Download Print this page

Kyocera TASKalfa 6550ci Service Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for TASKalfa 6550ci:

Operation manual (568 pages)

,

Quick manual (16 pages)

,

Safety manual (2 pages)

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual

TASKalfa 6550ci

TASKalfa 7550ci

SERVICE

MANUAL

Published in December 2013

2K9SM065

Rev. 5

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Chapters

Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the TASKalfa 6550ci and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for Kyocera TASKalfa 6550ci

Page 1 TASKalfa 6550ci TASKalfa 7550ci SERVICE MANUAL Published in December 2013 2K9SM065 Rev. 5...
Page 2 Notation of products in the manual For the purpose of this service manual, products are identified by print speed at A4 and black and white modes. TASKalfa 6550ci: 65 ppm model TASKalfa 7550ci: 75 ppm model...
Page 3: Revision History
Revision history Revision Date Replaced pages Remarks May 20, 2011 Contents, 1-1-3, 1-2-4, 1-2-11, 1-2-15, 1-2-17, 1-2-18, 1-2-24, 1-2-25, 1-2-34 to 1-2-78, 1-4-61 to 1-4-66, 1-4-73 to 1-4-75, 1-4-96 to 1-4-98, 1-4-100, 1-5-35, 1-5-36, 1-5-40, 1-5-41, 1-5-43 to 1-5-45, 1-5-107, 2-4-1 July 25, 2011 Contents, 1-1-1 to 1-1-3,1-2-7,1-2-15,1-2-22,1-2-25, 1-2-27,1-2-32,1-2-35,1-2-39,1-2-43,1-2-47,1-2-50,...
Page 4 Revision Date Replaced pages Remarks December 16, 2013 Contents, 1-2-32,1-2-37,1-2-40,1-2-48,1-2-49, 1-2-51,1-2-61 to 1-2-63,1-2-72,1-2-73,1-2-77,1-3-2, 1-3-4,1-3-6,1-3-9,1-3-10,1-3-17,1-3-18,1-3-21, 1-3-31,1-3-33,1-3-34,1-3-43,1-3-62,1-3-64,1-3-67, 1-3-69,1-3-73 to 1-3-76,1-3-80,1-3-85,1-3-90,1-3-95, 1-3-99,1-3-101,1-3-105,1-3-108,1-3-112 to 1-3-115, 1-3-128,1-3-139,1-3-140,1-3-147,1-3-149,1-3-150, 1-3-154,1-3-179,1-3-180,1-3-182 to 1-3-184, 1-3-186,1-3-188,1-3-189,1-3-191 to 1-3-194, 1-3-196,1-3-198,1-3-199,1-3-216,1-3-218,1-4-2, 1-4-4,1-4-24 to 1-4-290,1-4-307,1-5-33,1-5-59, 1-5-62,1-5-83,1-5-86,1-5-96,1-5-99,1-5-124, 1-5-125,1-6-2,2-1-9,2-1-10,2-2-6,2-2-7,2-3-73,2-4-1, 2-4-2,2-4-4 to 2-4-10,2-4-14,2-4-16,2-4-18,2-4-21, 2-4-31,2-4-37 to 2-4-51...
Page 5: Safety Precautions
Safety precautions This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Page 6: Safety Warnings And Precautions
Safety warnings and precautions Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below: DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Page 7: Installation Precautions
1. Installation Precautions WARNING • Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that it is adequate for the rated current...................... •...
Page 8: Precautions For Maintenance
2. Precautions for Maintenance WARNING • Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly....• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related brochures............................• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms and protective circuits.
Page 9 • Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement....... • Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing them; always hold the plug itself......................•...
Page 10 This page is intentionally left blank.
Page 11: Table Of Contents
2LB/2K9-5 CONTENTS 1-1 Specifications 1-1-1 Specifications ........................1-1-1 1-1-2 Parts names .......................... 1-1-5 (1) Machine ..........................1-1-5 (2) Option ..........................1-1-7 (3) Operation panel ........................ 1-1-8 1-1-3 Machine cross section ......................1-1-9 (1) Machine ..........................1-1-9 (2) Document processor ...................... 1-1-10 1-2 Installation 1-2-1 Installation environment......................
Page 12 2LB/2K9-5 (7) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the Secondary transfer part ....1-4-50 (8) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the fuser and eject part ......1-4-51 (9) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the duplex part ........1-4-53 (10) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the BR (bridge) part .......
Page 13: Assembly And Disassembly
(1) Precautions........................1-5-1 (2) Drum..........................1-5-1 (3) Toner ..........................1-5-1 (4) How to tell a genuine Kyocera toner container..............1-5-2 1-5-2 Paper feed section......................... 1-5-3 (1) Detaching and refitting the primary paper feed unit and PF primary paper feed unit ..1-5-3...
Page 14 2LB/2K9-3 1-5-3 Optical section ........................1-5-20 (1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp ..............1-5-20 (2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires ..............1-5-23 (3) Detaching and refitting the ISU..................1-5-27 (4) Detaching and refitting the LSU..................1-5-32 (5) Color registration adjustment..................1-5-38 1-5-4 Image formation section ......................
Page 15 2LB/2K9-4 1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement 1-6-1 Upgrading the firmware ......................1-6-1 1-6-2 Remarks on main PWB replacement..................1-6-4 1-6-3 Remarks on engine PWB replacement ................. 1-6-6 2-1 Mechanical Construction 2-1-1 Paper feed/conveying section ....................2-1-1 (1) Cassette paper feed section..................... 2-1-1 (2) Large capacity feeder .......................
Page 16 2LB/2K9-5 2-3-13 DP main PWB........................2-3-101 2-4 Appendixes 2-4-1 Appendixes ..........................2-4-1 (1) List of maintenance parts ....................2-4-1 (2) Maintenance kits....................... 2-4-3 (3) Periodic maintenance procedures ..................2-4-5 (4) Inner Cleaning ........................ 2-4-11 (5) Repetitive defects gauge ....................2-4-15 (6) Firmware environment commands .................
Page 17: Specifications
2LB/2K9-2 1-1 Specifications 1-1-1 Specifications Machine Specifications Item 65 ppm 75 ppm Type Console Printing method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser, tandem drum system Originals Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: A3/12 × 18") Original feed system Fixed Cassette 60 to 256 g/m Paper weight MP tray 60 to 300 g/m...
Page 18 2LB/2K9-2 Specifications Item 65 ppm 75 ppm 60 s or less Warm-up Power on 60 s or less time 30 s or less Low Power 30 s or less (22 °C/71.6 60 s or less 60 s or less Sleep °F, 60% RH) 550 sheets (64 g/m Cassette 1, 2...
Page 19 2LB/2K9-4 Specifications Item 65 ppm 75 ppm USB Interface connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB) Standard USB port: 2 (Hi-Speed USB) Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T) Interface Fax slot: 2 Option Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T) Resolution 600 × 600 dpi Temperature 10 to 32.5 °C/50 to 90.5 °F Humidity 15 to 80% RH...
Page 20: Document Processor
2LB/2K9 Scanner Item Specifications CPU: 600 MHz or higher System requirements RAM: 128 MB or more Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi, 200 ×100 dpi, 200 × 400 dpi TIFF, JPEG, XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression), File format PDF (high compression) B/W : 120 images/min Scanning speed...
Page 21: Parts Names
2LB/2K9 1-1-2 Parts names (1) Machine Figure 1-1-1 1. Document processor 12. Front upper cover 2. Operation panel 13. Waste toner box 3. Original size indicator plate 14. Release button 4. Platen (Contact glass) 15. Handles 5. Slit glass 16. Left lower tray 6.
Page 22 2LB/2K9 Figure 1-1-2 22. Cassette 1 34. Duplex cover 23. Cassette 2 35. Duplex cover lever 24. Cassette 3 36. MP paper width guides 25. Cassette 4 37. MP support Tray 26. Paper length guide 38. MP (Multi-Purpose) tray 27. Guide lock lever 39.
Page 23 2LB/2K9 (2) Option Figure 1-1-3 1. Machine 5. Side deck 2. Side multi tray 6. 4000-sheet finisher 3. Side paper feeder 7. Center-folding unit 4. Side large capacity feeder 8. Mailbox 1-1-7...
Page 24: Operation Panel
2LB/2K9 (3) Operation panel 22 23 Figure 1-1-4 1. Program key 11. Power key 21. Enter key 2. Status/Job cancel key 12. Counter key 22. Start key 3. Copy key 13. Main power indicator 23. Stop key 4. Accessibility display key 14.
Page 25: Machine Cross Section
2LB/2K9 1-1-3 Machine cross section (1) Machine Paper path Figure 1-1-5 1. Paper feed section 8. Drum unit M 17. Secondary transfer/Separation (cassette 1, 2) 9. Drum unit C sections 2. Paper feed section 10. Drum unit Y 18. Fuser section (cassette 3, 4) 11.
Page 26: Document Processor
2LB/2K9 (2) Document processor Original path Figure 1-1-6 1. Original feed section 2. Original conveying section 3. Original eject section 1-1-10...
Page 27: Installation Environment
2LB/2K9-4 1-2 Installation 1-2-1 Installation environment 1. Temperature: 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F 2. Humidity: 15 to 80% RH 3. Power supply: 120 V AC, 8.0 A + 12.0 A 220 - 240 V AC, 10.0 A 4. Power source frequency: 50 Hz ± 2%/60 Hz ± 2% 5.
Page 28: Unpacking And Installation
2LB/2K9 1-2-2 Unpacking and installation (1) Installation procedure Start Replacing operation panel sheet Unpacking Taking out the machine Installing other optional devices Removing the tapes and spacers Installing the stoppers Installing the cassette heater (option) Installing the operation arm Connect the power cord Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame Adjusting the image Release of lift plate stopper (cassette 1 and 2)
Page 29 2LB/2K9 Moving the machine When moving the machine, pull out the carrying handle, and move with the carrying handle and three hand- holds. Handhold Handhold Handhold Carrying handle Figure 1-2-2 1-2-3...
Page 30 2LB/2K9-1 Unpacking 27 28 18,19,20 21,22 Figure 1-2-3 1. Machine 11. Right stays 21. Operation panel sheets 2. Outer case 12. Machine cover 22. Operation guide etc. 3. Inner case 13. Front pad 23. Toner disposal box case 4. Skid 14.
Page 31 2LB/2K9 Operation arm Figure 1-2-4 1. Arm outer case 8. Operation mount cover A 15. Stopper case 2. Arm bottom spacer 9. Operation mount cover B 16. Plastic bags 3. Arm main pad 10. Arm hinge cover A 17. Stoppers 4.
Page 32 2LB/2K9 Taking out the machine *: When taking out the machine, a space for machine rear requires approximately 2 m. 1. Remove the hinge joints, and then remove the outer case, the inner case, the top left/right pads, the left/right stays, the front pad, the upper spacer, the operation arm and the bottom spacer.
Page 33 2LB/2K9-2 5. Check that there is no level difference in slopes (circle section of figure 1-2-7). 6. Open the machine cover. 7. Lift the machine each left and right one side, and then remove the bottom left and right pads and machine cover. Bottom right pad Slope Bottom left pad...
Page 34 2LB/2K9 Removing the tapes and spacers 1. Remove five tapes and then remove the Tape sheet. Top sheet Tape Tape Tape Tape Figure 1-2-9 2. Remove five tapes. Tape Tape Tape Tape Tape Figure 1-2-10 1-2-8...
Page 35 2LB/2K9 3. Open the original width guides and then Original width guide remove the spacer. Original width guide Spacer Figure 1-2-11 Tape 4. Remove fourteen tapes, silica gel and sheet. Tape Silica gel Tape Tape Tape Tape Tape Tape Tape Tape Tape Sheet...
Page 36 2LB/2K9 5. Remove six tapes and then remove three protect sheets. Protect sheet Tapes Tapes Protect sheet Figure 1-2-13 6. Open the DP. Tape 7. Remove four tapes and then remove the sheet. Tape 8. Remove the tape and then remove two Sheet A3 papers.
Page 37 2LB/2K9-1 10. Open the front upper cover. 11. Remove two tapes and then remove two spacers 12. Close the front upper cover. Spacer Spacer Tape Tape Front upper cover Figure 1-2-15 Installing the operation arm 1. Remove the operation mount cover C. Operation mount cover C Figure 1-2-16...
Page 38 2LB/2K9 2. Insert two hooks and the install the Hooks operation arm to the machine. Operation arm Figure 1-2-17 Upper side 3. Align the two positioning keys with each Positioning other, fix the operation arm using four M4x8 screws a top and two M4x8 Screw screws from the right side.
Page 39 2LB/2K9 4. Connect four connectors of the opera- tion arm to connectors of the machine. Connector Connector Connector Connector Figure 1-2-19 5. Fit the operation mount cover A and B using three M4 x 8 screws (black). Operation mount cover B Operation mount cover A Screw...
Page 40 2LB/2K9 6. Fit the arm hinge cover A and B using the M4 x 8 screws (black). Arm hinge cover B Arm hinge cover A Screw Figure 1-2-21 7. Fit the operation mount cover C using the M4 x 8 screws (black). Screw Operation mount cover C...
Page 41 2LB/2K9-2 Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame 1. Open the DP. 2. Remove the tape and then remove the ISU lock leaflet. 3. Remove the scanner lock cover. 4. Mount the scanner lock cover in the reverse manner to restore in the original location.
Page 42 2LB/2K9 Release of lift plate stopper (cassette 1 and 2) 1. Pull cassette 1 and 2 out. 2. Remove the lift plate stopper from each cassette and attach it to the storage location. When moving the machine, attach the lift plate in original position. Lift plate stopper Cassette...
Page 43 2LB/2K9-1 2. Press the guide lock lever to release the lock. 3. Grasp the paper width adjusting tab and move the paper width guides to fit the paper. Guide lock lever Paper width Paper width guides adjusting tab Figure 1-2-26 4.
Page 44 2LB/2K9-4 5. Press the guide lock lever to lock. Guide lock lever Figure 1-2-28 6. Insert the paper size plate and the Paper media plate paper media plate. 7. Gently push the cassette back in. Paper size plate Figure 1-2-29 1-2-18...
Page 45 2LB/2K9 Release of lift plate stopper (cassette 3 and 4) 1. Pull cassette 3 and 4 out. 2. Remove the lift plate stopper from each cassette and attach it to the storage location. When moving the machine, attach the Lift plate lift plate in original position.
Page 46 2LB/2K9 2. Insert the paper size guide A into the Lock lever slot (bottom of cassette) for the paper size to be used. 3. Make sure that the top of the paper size guide A matches the paper size to be used, attach the lock lever, and rotate the lever to lock it.
Page 47 2LB/2K9 5. Adjust the paper size guide B to the [A4] paper size. Insert the paper size guide B into the slot marked A4 (on the bottom of the cassette), and lock the hook. Gently try moving the paper size guide B to verify that it is fixed.
Page 48 2LB/2K9-4 6. Align the paper flush against the right Paper side of the cassette. *: Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. *: Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicated. Figure 1-2-35 7.
Page 49 2LB/2K9 Installing the toner containers 1. Open the front upper cover. 2. Hold the toner container vertically and hit the upper part about 5 times. Invert the toner container so that the other end is up, and hit in the same way. 3.
Page 50 2LB/2K9-1 Unlocking the developer waste exit Caution To ease setup, the device was shipped Tape with the developer unit already replenished with developer. Therefore, to prevent developer from spilling during shipping, a Tape developer shutter is equipped with the developer unit. To disengage the shutter, use the following Wate toner box cover...
Page 51 2LB/2K9-2 4. Rotate four fixing levers all the way counterclockwise. Push the lever until it stops and rotate it all the way clockwise. *: Check that the fixing lever arm is in its vertical position. Fixing lever Figure 1-2-41 5. Remove a screw and slide the lever left wards.
Page 52 2LB/2K9 Installing the toner disposal box 1. Remove the tape. 2. Remove the cable cover. Cable cover Tape Toner disposal box Figure 1-2-43 3. Fit the toner disposal box using three M3 x 8 S tight screws. Toner disposal box Screw Screw Screws...
Page 53 2LB/2K9-2 4. Connect two connectors. 5. Fit the cable cover using M3 x 8 P tight screw. *: If power is turned on without the toner waste box installed, the C Call 7460 is caused. FAN1 unconnected: C7470 Connectors FAN2 unconnected: C7480 Cable cover Screw Toner disposal box...
Page 54 2LB/2K9 1. Insert a flat-head screwdriver and slide the operation panel covers A and B to remove them. Operation panel cover B Operation panel cover A Figure 1-2-46 2. Remove the clear panel. Clear panel Figure 1-2-47 1-2-28...
Page 55 2LB/2K9 3. Remove the operation panel sheet. 4. Replace the operation panel sheet of the corresponding language. 5. Refit the clear panel. 6. Refit the operation panel covers A and Operation panel sheet Figure 1-2-48 Installing other optional devices 1. Install the optional devices (document finisher, side feeder and/or fax kit etc.) as necessary.
Page 56 2LB/2K9 The above is not required when an optional document finisher or the side feeder has Screws been installed. Stopper 1. Fix the stoppers with two screws at the bottom right of the device. Use the upper screw holes. Screw Screw Screw Stopper...
Page 57 2LB/2K9-4 Connect the power cord 1. Connect the power cord to the power cord connector on rear lower of the machine. 2. Connect the power plug to the wall out- let. Power cords 120 V specifications Power cord 220 - 240 V specifications Figure 1-2-51 Adjusting the image 1.
Page 58: Performing Calibration
2LB/2K9-5 3. Performing drum refresh (see the operation guide) Press the System menu key. Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of [Drum Refresh]. Press [Execute] to perform drum refresh. When completed, press [OK]. 4. Performing LSU cleaning (see the operation guide) Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of [Laser Scanner Cleaning].
Page 59 2LB/2K9 Setting the delivery date (maintenance item U278) 1. Enter the maintenance mode by entering 10871087 using the numeric keys. 2. Enter 278 using the numeric keys and press the start key. 3. Select [Today]. 4. Press the start key. The delivery date is set. 5.
Page 60: Setting Initial Copy Modes
2LB/2K9 (2) Setting initial copy modes Factory settings are as follows: Maintenance Contents Factory setting item No. U253 Switching between double and single counts DBL(A3/Ledger) U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting Eject U276 Setting the copy count mode Mode0 U284 Setting 2 color copy mode U285...
Page 61: Installing The Key Counter (Option)
2LB/2K9-4 1-2-3 Installing the key counter (option) Key counter installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. Key counter 3025418011 Key counter set 302A369709 Key counter wire* 302K946AJ0 Tray mount set 302LF94291 *: Not used in 120V model. Supplied parts of key counter set (302A369709): Parts Quantity Part.No.
Page 62 2LB/2K9-4 Procedure 1. Press the power key on the operation Key counter M4 x 6 screw retainer panel to off. Make sure that the power indicator and the memory indicator are M4 x 6 screw off before turning off the main power M3 nut switch.
Page 63 2LB/2K9-5 6. Remove the controller cover. 7. Remove the screw and then remove the controller lid. Screw Controller lid Controller cover Figure 1-2-54 1-2-37...
Page 64 2LB/2K9-1 8. Release seven wire saddles on the con- troller box. Wire holder 9. Remove the wire holder. Wire Wire saddles saddles Controller box Wire saddle Wire saddle Figure 1-2-55 1-2-38...
Page 65 2LB/2K9-2 10. Remove the connector from the DP relay PWB, Connector 11. Remove the following connectors that DP relay PWB connected to the main PWB from the outside of the control box. YC25 YC11 YC30 YC24 YC3 (FFC connector with a lock) YC17 (BK) Controller box YC21 (WH)
Page 66 2LB/2K9-5 12. Remove five screws. 13. Unhook two hooks and then remove the controller box. Controller box Hook Screw Hook Screws Screws Figure 1-2-57 14. Remove the screw and then remove the Screw operation mount cover C. Operation mount cover C Figure 1-2-58 1-2-40...
Page 67 2LB/2K9-1 15. Remove the screw and then remove the arm hinge cover A and B. Screw Arm hinge cover B Arm hinge cover A Figure 1-2-59 16. Remove the screw and then remove the Screw operation mount cover A. Operation mount cover A Figure 1-2-60 1-2-41...
Page 68 2LB/2K9-1 17. Cut out the aperture plate on the opera- tion mount cover B using nippers. Aperture Operation mount cover B Figure 1-2-61 18. Connect the connector of the key coun- ter wire to the connector YC24 on the engine PWB. Engine PWB Key counter wire YC24...
Page 69 2LB/2K9-2 19. Remove two wire holders. 20. Route the key counter wire through the wire guide and fix it at the wire holders. Key counter wire Wire guide Wire holders Figure 1-2-63 21. Route the key counter wire through the three wire saddles and fix it at the wire holder.
Page 70 2LB/2K9-1 22. Pass the connector of the key counter Key counter wire wire through the aperture in the opera- tion mount cover B and refit the opera- tion mount cover A. 23. Refit the arm hinge cover A, B and operation mount cover C.
Page 71 2LB/2K9-1 27. Fit the tray mount to the operation arm M4 x 20 M4 x 20 using two M4 x 20 tap-tight S screws. tap-tight S tap-tight S screw screw Tray mount Figure 1-2-67 28. Cut out the aperture plate on the tray cover using nippers.
Page 72 2LB/2K9-1 30. Fit the key counter cover retainer to the M4 x 20 M4 x 20 tray cover using two M4 x 20 tap-tight S tap-tight S tap-tight S screws. screw screw Key counter cover retainer Figure 1-2-69 31. Connect the key counter signal cable to Key counter cover M4 x 6 screw the key counter wire.
Page 73: Installing The Key Card Mk-2 (Option For Japan Only)
2LB/2K9-2 1-2-4 Installing the key card MK-2 (option for japan only) Key card installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. Key card MK-2 8J272002 (option) MK-2 mount Supplied with MK-2 M4 x 16 screw Document table 1902H70UN1 (option) M4 x 20 tap-tight S screw 7BB100420H Supplied parts of tray mount set (302LF94290): Parts...
Page 74 2LB/2K9-5 3. Remove the controller cover. 4. Remove the screw and then remove the controller lid. Screw Controller lid Controller cover Figure 1-2-72 1-2-48...
Page 75 2LB/2K9-5 5. Release seven wire saddles on the con- troller box. Wire holder 6. Remove the wire holder. Wire Wire saddles saddles Controller box Wire saddle Wire saddle Figure 1-2-73 1-2-49...
Page 76 2LB/2K9-2 7. Remove the connector from the DP relay PWB, Connector 8. Remove the following connectors that connected to the main PWB from the DP relay PWB outside of the control box. YC25 YC11 YC30 YC24 YC3 (FFC connector with a lock) YC17 (BK) YC21 (WH) Controller box...
Page 77 2LB/2K9-5 9. Remove five screws. 10. Unhook two hooks and then remove the controller box. Controller box Hook Screw Hook Screws Screws Figure 1-2-75 11. Remove the screw and then remove the Screw operation mount cover C. Operation mount cover C Figure 1-2-76 1-2-51...
Page 78 2LB/2K9-1 12. Cut out the aperture plate on the opera- tion mount cover C using nippers. Aperture Operation mount cover C Figure 1-2-77 13. Pass the MK-2 signal cable through the aperture in the operation mount cover Aperture MK-2 signal cable Figure 1-2-78 1-2-52...
Page 79 2LB/2K9-1 14. Connect the connector of the MK-2 sig- nal cable to the connector YC25 on the engine PWB. Ground terminal 15. Remove the screw from the machine. 16. Fix the MK-2 signal cable to the ground Screw terminal with the screw that was removed.
Page 80 2LB/2K9-1 17. Remove two wire holders. 18. Route the MK-2 signal cable through the wire guide and fix it at two wire hold- ers. 19. Refit the operation mount cover C. 20. Refit the controller box. 21. Refit the left upper cover and the rear upper cover.
Page 81 2LB/2K9-1 23. Fit the tray mount to the operation arm M4 x 20 M4 x 20 using two M4 x 20 tap-tight S screws. tap-tight S tap-tight S screw screw Tray mount Figure 1-2-82 24. Fit the tray cover to the tray stay using M4 x 8 screw two M4 x 8 screws.
Page 82 2LB/2K9-1 25. Remove the four screws securing the MK-2 cover; attach the MK-2 mount to the MK-2, and secure using the four MK-2 screws. Screws Screws MK-2 Screws MK-2 mount Screws Figure 1-2-84 26. Fit the MK-2 to the tray cover using two M4 x 20 tap-tight S M4 x 20 tap-tight S screws.
Page 83: Installing The Kmas (Option For Japan Only)
2LB/2K9-1 1-2-5 Installing the KMAS (option for japan only) KMAS installation requires the following parts: Using the PHS module Parts Quantity Part.No. PHS module HM000080 (option) PHS signal cable 023CK200 (option) KMAS interface PWB 023CK000 (option) M3 x 16 bronze binding screw B3323160 Ferrite core 2A027770...
Page 84 2LB/2K9-1 Procedure To fix KMAS, perform the following procedure: Start Setting the DIP switch Fitting the KMAS interface PWB Using the PHS module Using a modem Fitting the PHS signal cable Fitting the RS-232C signal cable and PHS module Initializing the KMAS 1-2-58...
Page 85 2LB/2K9-1 Setting the DIP switch 1. Configure DIP switches 1 to 4 on the KMAS interface board as follows: DIP switch Figure 1-2-86 DIP SW No. Description Remarks PHS module/modem switching ON: Use modem OFF: Use PHS module Modem outgoing switching This is required when modem is used.
Page 86 2LB/2K9-1 Fitting the KMAS interface PWB 2. Remove eight screws and then remove the rear upper cover. Rear upper cover Screws Screws Screws Screws Figure 1-2-87 3. Attach one spacer A and three spacers Controller box B to the side of the controller box. Spacer B Spacer A Spacer B...
Page 87 2LB/2K9-5 4. Insert the KMAS interface PWB to three Spacer B spacers B. Spacer B Spacer B KMAS interface PWB Figure 1-2-89 1-2-61...
Page 88 2LB/2K9-5 5. Connect the connector of the KMAS wire to the connector YC1 on the KMAS PWB. 6. Connect the connector of the KMAS wire to controller fan motor, YC7 and YC23 on the main PWB. KMAS wire KMAS interface PWB Main PWB KMAS wire Controller fan motor...
Page 89 2LB/2K9-5 7. Pass the KMAS wire through the edging of the controller box and wire saddle and then fasten the KMAS wire. Edging KMAS wire Wire saddle Figure 1-2-91 Fitting the PHS signal cable and PHS mod- Rear upper cover 8.
Page 90 2LB/2K9-1 11. Connect the connector of the PHS sig- nal cable to the connector YC2 on the KMAS KMAS interface PWB. interface PWB 12. Refit the rear upper cover. PHS signal cable Figure 1-2-93 13. Fit the PHS module to rear upper cover using two M3 x 16 screws.
Page 91 2LB/2K9-1 14. Wrap the PHS signal cable around the ferrite core a turn. 15. Connect the connector of the PHS sig- nal cable to PHS module. 16. Fit the clamp to PHS signal cable. PHS module 17. After using alcohol to clean the rear upper cover, adhere the clamp to rear upper cover.
Page 92: Installing The Coin Vender (Option For Japan Only)
2LB/2K9-3 1-2-6 Installing the coin vender (option for japan only) Coin vender installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. 1905H99JP0 (option) Coin vender Vender wire Vender base Supplied with M4 x 6 screw coin vender Ferrite core Clamp Vender signal cable 302K946AE0 Procedure 1.
Page 93 2LB/2K9-1 3. Remove eight screws and then remove the rear upper cover. Rear upper cover Screws Screws Screws Screws Figure 1-2-97 4. Cover the area under the toner disposal box to prevent contamination due to the scattered toner. 5. Remove the screw and then remove the cable cover.
Page 94 2LB/2K9-1 7. Remove three screws and then remove the toner disposal box. Toner disposal box Screws Screw Screw Screw Toner disposal box Screw Figure 1-2-99 8. Remove nine screws. 9. Release two hanging parts and then remove the rear lower cover. Screw Screw Screws...
Page 95 2LB/2K9-2 10. Remove two screws and then remove the lid. Screws Figure 1-2-101 YC23 11. Connect the connector of the vender Engine PWB Wire guide signal cable to the connector YC23 on the engine PWB. 12. Pass the vender signal cable through the wire guide and ten wire saddles and then fasten the cable.
Page 96 2LB/2K9-1 13. Pass the vender wire through the aper- ture in the IF mount. 14. Secure the vender wire with two screws Ground removed in step 10. terminal 15. Secure the ground terminal of the vender wire to rear frame with the screw.
Page 97 2LB/2K9-1 19. Fit the ferrite core to signal cable of coin vender. Coin vender 20. Fit the clamp to signal cable of coin vender. 21. Remove a screw from the coin vender Clamp and fix the coin vender with a clamp. Screw Ferrite core Signal cable...
Page 98: Installing The Cassette Heater (Option)
2LB/2K9-5 1-2-7 Installing the cassette heater (option) Cassette heater installation requires the following parts: 120 V specifications Parts Quantity Part.No. Cassette heater set 302K994931 (for cassette 1 and 2) Cassette heater set 303NF94130 (for cassette 3 and 4) Supplied parts of cassette heater set (302K994931): Parts Quantity Part.No.
Page 99 2LB/2K9-5 220 - 240 V specifications Parts Quantity Part.No. Cassette heater set 240V 302K994941 (for cassette 1 and 2) Cassette heater set 240V 303NF94140 (for cassette 3 and 4) Supplied parts of cassette heater set (302K994941): Parts Quantity Part.No. Cassette heater 240V 302H794610 Wire saddle 7YZM610001++H01...
Page 100 2LB/2K9-4 Procedure Installing for cassette 1 and 2 1. Press the power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the power indicator and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet.
Page 101 2LB/2K9-1 6. Fit three wire saddles on the bottom frame of the machine. 7. Fit the cassette heater using two M3 x 8 screws. Wire saddles Screw Screw Cassette heater Figure 1-2-109 1-2-75...
Page 102 2LB/2K9-4 8. Pass the wire of the cassette heater through three wire saddles and then fasten the wire. *: Route the wire so that it do not disturb opening and closing the cassettes. 9. Connect the connector of the cassette Connector heater to the connector in the rear frame of the machine.
Page 103 2LB/2K9-5 10. Insert two hooks of the connector cover to the holes of base of the machine each. 11. Install the connector cover by using a Cassette heater M4 x 8 screw. Connector cover Screw Hook Hook Figure 1-2-111 12. Adhere the caution label after wiping the bottom frame of this side of cassette heater with alcohol.
Page 104 2LB/2K9-1 13. To install Cassette 1 and Cassette 2, align the cassette slider 2 and cassette slider 1 with each other. Cassette 1, 2 14. Push the cassette in fully. Cassette slider 2 Cassette slider 1 Figure 1-2-113 1-2-78...
Page 105 2LB/2K9-3 Installing for cassette 3 and 4 1. Press the power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the power indicator and the memory indicator are Cassette 3 off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet.
Page 106 2LB/2K9-2 6. Fit three wire saddles on the bottom frame of the machine. 7. Fit the cassette heater using two M3 x 8 screws. Wire saddles Screw Screw Cassette heater Figure 1-2-116 8. Pass the wire of the cassette heater through three wire saddles and then Connector fasten the wire.
Page 107 2LB/2K9-2 10. Insert two hooks of the connector cover to the holes of base of the machine each. 11. Install the connector cover by using a M4 x 8 screw. Connector cover Screw Hook Hook Figure 1-2-118 12. Adhere the caution label after wiping the bottom frame of this side of cassette heater with alcohol.
Page 108: Installing The Gigabit Ethernet Board (Option)
2LB/2K9-2 1-2-8 Installing the gigabit ethernet board (option) Gigabit ethernet board installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. Gigabit ethernet board 1505JV0UN0 (option) Procedure 1. Press the power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the power indicator and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch.
Page 109: Gigabit Ethernet Board
2LB/2K9-2 4. Insert the gigabit ethernet board along the groove in OPT2 and secure the board with two pins that have been Gigabit removed in step 3. ethernet board *: Do not directly touch the gigabit ethernet board terminal. Hold the top and bottom of the gigabit ethernet board, or the projection of the board to insert the gigabit ethernet board.
Page 110: Installing The Ic Card Reader Holder (Option)
2LB/2K9-2 1-2-9 Installing the IC card reader holder (option) IC card reader holder installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. IC card reader holder 1709AD0UN0 (option) Supplied parts of IC card reader holder (1709AD0UN0): Parts Quantity Part.No. Card reader case Card reader base Card reader mount Card reader tray...
Page 111 2LB/2K9-2 7. Cut out the aperture plate on the opera- tion mount cover C using nippers. 8. Refit the right upper cover, clip holder Right upper cover and ISU right cover. Aperture Figure 1-2-125 9. Remove the pin of the card reader base and then remove the card reader mount.
Page 112 2LB/2K9-2 10. Fit the card reader mount to the machine using two pins. Card reader mount Pins Figure 1-2-127 11. Refit the card reader base to card reader mount using the pin removed in step 9. Card reader mount Card reader base Figure 1-2-128 1-2-86...
Page 113 2LB/2K9-2 12. Fit the card reader tray to the card reader base. Choose the direction of mounting the IC card reader according to the depth of the reader. Card reader tray 10mm to 22mm: Face the mark A upwards. Less than 10mm: Face the mark B upwards.
Page 114 2LB/2K9-2 14. Hook the two hooks of the card reader Card reader case case to fit the card reader case to the card reader base. Press its top until it clicks in. Hooks Figure 1-2-131 15. Remove the controller cover. Controller cover Figure 1-2-132 1-2-88...
Page 115 2LB/2K9-3 16. Fit six clamps. Right side: three Rear side: three Clamps Clamps Figure 1-2-133 17. Pass the USB wire of the IC card reader Clamps through six clamps and then fasten the wire. 18. Connect the USB wire to the machine. If the length does not suffice, use the USB wire supplied.
Page 116 2LB/2K9-2 Enabling IC Card Authentication Precautions To install the optional function, you need the License Key. Please access the designated website of your dealer or service representative, and register “Machine No.” indicated on your machine and “Product ID” indi- cated on the License Certificate supplied with the product to issue the License Key. 1.
Page 117: Installing The Keyboard Holder (Option)
2LB/2K9-2 1-2-10 Installing the keyboard holder (option) Keyboard holder installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. Keyboard holder 1709AF0UN0 (option) Supplied parts of keyboard holder (1709AF0UN0): Parts Quantity Part.No. Upper keyboard holder Lower keyboard holder Keyboard cover Velcro A Velcro B Film M4 x 8 tap-tight S screw...
Page 118 2LB/2K9-2 4. Insert the bent piece on the upper key- board mount into the aperture. Upper keyboard mount 5. Fit the upper keyboard mount to the machine using two M3 x 8 tap-tight S screws. Aperture M3 x 8 tap-tight S screw Figure 1-2-136 6.
Page 119 2LB/2K9-2 7. Latch the keyboard cover with the Hooks Upper keyboard upper keyboard mount by the five Hook mount hooks. 8. Fit the keyboard cover to the upper key- board mount using three M4 x 8 tap- tight P screws. 9.
Page 120 2LB/2K9-2 10. Affix a film piece over the mounting of Film the upper keyboard mount. Film Figure 1-2-139 Velcro tape 11. Adhere two Velcro tapes onto the upper Velcro tape keyboard mount. Upper keyboard mount Figure 1-2-140 1-2-94...
Page 121 2LB/2K9-2 12. Adhere two Velcro tapes onto back side Velcro tape Velcro tape of the keyboard. Keyboard (back side) Figure 1-2-141 13. Align the Velcro tapes with each other, Keyboard mount the keyboard onto the upper key- board mount. Upper keyboard mount Figure 1-2-142 1-2-95...
Page 122 2LB/2K9-2 14. Remove the controller cover. Controller cover Figure 1-2-143 15. Fit six clamps. Right side: three Rear side: three Clamps Clamps Figure 1-2-144 1-2-96...
Page 123 2LB/2K9-2 16. Pass the USB wire of the IC card reader Clamps through six clamps and then fasten the wire. 17. Connect the USB wire to the machine. 18. Refit the controller cover. Clamps USB wire USB wire Figure 1-2-145 1-2-97...
Page 124: Installing The Handset (Option For Japan Only)
2LB/2K9-2 1-2-11 Installing the handset (option for japan only) Handset installation requires the following parts: Parts Quantity Part.No. Handset 1909AG9JP0 (option) Supplied parts of handset (1909AG9JP0): Parts Quantity Part.No. Handset Handset base Handset mount Protection cover Telephone wire Modular cable M4 nut 3CY06030 1-2-98...
Page 125 2LB/2K9-2 Procedure 1. Press the power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the power indicator and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. 2.
Page 126 2LB/2K9-2 7. Mount two M4 nuts at the back of the ISU rear cover. ISU rear cover 8. Fit the handset mount to the ISU rear cover using two pins. Use the lower screw holes. Handset mount M4 nuts Pins Pins Figure 1-2-148 9.
Page 127 2LB/2K9-3 13. Insert the pins at the insert parts on the back of the handset base, and slide it towards you. Handset base Figure 1-2-150 1-2-101...
Page 128 14. Fit the protection cover to the handset mount. Protection cover Handset mount Figure 1-2-151 15. Connect the telephone wire to the handset and the handset base. Handset Handset base Telephone wire Figure 1-2-152...
Page 129 2LB/2K9 16. Connect the modular cable to the hand- set base and the machine. Modular cable Handset base Modular cable Figure 1-2-153 1-2-103...
Page 130 2LB/2K9 This page is intentionally left blank. 1-2-104...
Page 131: Maintenance Mode
2LB/2K9 1-3 Maintenance Mode 1-3-1 Maintenance mode The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine. (1) Executing a maintenance item Start Enter “10871087” using Maintenance mode is entered. the numeric keys. Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up/down keys The maintenance item is selected.
Page 132: Maintenance Modes Item List
2LB/2K9-5 (2) Maintenance modes item list Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 65ppm 75ppm General U000 Output Maintenance Report U001 Exiting the maintenance mode U002 Error codes U003 Setting the service telephone number U004 Setting the machine number U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID U019 Displaying the ROM version Initializa-...
Page 133 2LB/2K9-4 Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 65ppm 75ppm Drive, U053 Setting the adjustment of the motor paper speed feed and 8/0/0/0 7/0/0/0 Motor1 paper 0/0/0/16/0 0/0/0/15/0 Motor2 convey- ing sys- 0/-28/0/0/0/ 0/-26/0/0/0/ Motor3 59/0/64/-25/-25/0/0/0/ 54/0/59/-22/-22/0/0/0/ 15/17 Motor4 0/0/12/0 Motor5 0/-22/0/0/0/...
Page 134 2LB/2K9-5 Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 65ppm 75ppm Optical U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern 112/112/112/75/0 U091 Setting the white line correction 50/50/50/50/50/50/50/50/50 U099 Adjusting original size detection High U100 Adjusting main high voltage voltage Adj AC Bias Set AC Auto Adj Set DC Bias 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/-...
Page 135 2LB/2K9-2 Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 65ppm 75ppm 174/149/141 195/162/154 High U106 Normal2/3 2nd 3/4(Gloss) voltage 163/140/120 183/148/130 Normal2/3 1st B/W 170/145/140 Normal2/3 2nd B/W 193/170/140 Light/Normal 2nd B/W 141/128/124 145/128/124 Heavy1 1st 3/4 158/141/124 160/143/124 Heavy1 2nd 3/4 158/141/124 160/143/124 Heavy2/3 1st Half...
Page 136 2LB/2K9-5 Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 65ppm 75ppm Developer U139 Displaying the temperature and humidity outside the machine U140 Displaying developer bias 70/70/70/70/- 70/70/70/70/70 Sleeve DC 168/168/168/ 168/168/168/168/ Sleeve AC 168/- 155/155/155/ 155/155/155/155/ Mag DC 155/- 224/224/176/ 224/224/176/200/ Mag AC 200/-...
Page 137 2LB/2K9 Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 65ppm 75ppm Fuser U161 Setting the fuser control temperature 170/150/100/175/170/ 175/150/100/180/ Warm Up 130/40/100 175/130/40/100 170/0 175/0 Print Mode0 Grain Mode U163 Resetting the fuser problem data U167 Checking/clearing the fuser count U169 Checking/setting the fuser power source U199 Displaying fuser heater temperature U200 Turning all LEDs on...
Page 138 2LB/2K9-2 Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 65ppm 75ppm Operation U241 Checking the operation of the switches panel and of the finisher support U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors equip- U244 Checking the DP switches ment U245 Checking messages U246 Setting the finisher 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0...
Page 139 2LB/2K9-5 Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 65ppm 75ppm 190/1 Mode U340 Setting the applied mode setting Adj Memory Copy:10 / Printer:50 Adj Max Job ― U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication...
Page 140 2LB/2K9-5 Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 65ppm 75ppm Image U464 Driving Time process- 3600 Timing 890/910/910/800/400/400/380/430 Target Value Print Rate (B/W) ― Calib Solid Image ― U465 Data reference for ID correction U467 Setting the color registration adjustment Color Regist Timing ―...
Page 141 2LB/2K9 Initial setting Item Section Content of maintenance item 65ppm 75ppm Others U927 Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts (one time only) U928 Checking machine life counts U930 Checking/clearing the charger roller count U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP 0/0/0 U952 Maintenance mode workflow U964 Checking of log...
Page 142: Contents Of The Maintenance Mode Items
2LB/2K9 (3) Contents of the maintenance mode items Item No. Description U000 Output Maintenance Report Description Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call occurrences. Outputs the event log or service status page. Also sends output data to the USB memory.
Page 143: Output List
2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U000 Method: Send to the USB memory 1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the main power indicator has gone off, switch off the main power switch. 2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot. 3.
Page 144: Event Log
2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U000 Event log Event Log 17/Apr/2011 08:40 Firmware version 2K9_2000.000.000 2011.04.17 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] (12) Paper Jam Log Counter Log Count. Event Descriprions J0000: J0041: C0000: T00: 9999999 0501.01.08.01.01 J0001: J0042: C0001: T01: 8888888 4002.01.08.01.01 J0002: J0043: C0002:...
Page 145 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U000 Detail of event log Items Description Controller BROM version Operation panel mask version Machine serial number Paper Jam Count. Event Descriptions Remembers 1 to 16 of The total page count Log code (hexadeci- occurrence. If the occur- at the time of the mal, 5 categories) rence of the previous...
Page 146 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U000 Items Description Paper Jam (d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal) cont. 01: Plain 0A: Color 15: Custom 1 02: Transparency 0B: Prepunched 16: Custom 2 03: Preprinted 0C: Envelope 17: Custom 3 04: Labels 0D: Cardstock 18: Custom 4 05: Bond 0E: Coated...
Page 147 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U000 Items Description Service Call Count. Service Code Remembers 1 to 8 The total page Self diagnostic error code of occurrence of self count at the time of (See page 1-4-63) diagnostics error. If the self diagnostics the occurrence of error.
Page 148 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U000 Items Description (11) Unknown Toner Count. Item Remembers 1 to 5 The total page count Unknown toner log of occurrence of at the time of the code unknown toner toner empty error (1 byte, 2 categories) detection.
Page 149: Service Status Page
2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U000 Service status page (1) Service Status Page 17/04/2011 12:00 Firmware version 2K9_2000.000.000 2011.04.17 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] Controller Information (30) FAX Information Slot1/Slot2 (31) Rings (Normal) Memory status (32) Rings (FAX/TEL) Total Size 2.0 GB (33) Rings (TAD) (34) Option DIMM Size...
Page 150: Engine Information
2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U000 Service status page (2) Service Status Page 17/04/2011 12:00 Firmware version 2K9_2000.000.000 2011.04.17 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] Engine Information Send Information (40) (44) NVRAM Version _1F31225_1F31225 Date and Time 11/04/17 (41) (45) Scanner Version 2K9_1200.001.089 Address (42) FAX Slot1 FAX BOOT Version...
Page 151 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U000 Detail of service status page Description Supplement Firmware version System date Engine soft version Engine boot version Operation panel mask version Machine serial number Total memory size Local time zone Report output date Day/Month/Year hour:minute (10) NTP server name (11)
Page 152 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U000 Description Supplement (26) Average coverage for printer Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (27) Average coverage for fax Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (28) Cleared date and output date (29) Coverage on the final output page (30) Fax kit information This item is printed only when the fax kit is installed.
Page 153 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U000 Description Supplement (42) Fax firmware version This item is printed only when the fax kit is installed. (43) Mac address (44) The last sent date and time (45) Transmission address (46) Destination information (47) Area information (48) Margin settings Top margin/Left margin...
Page 154 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U000 Description Supplement (63) Job end detection mode (64) Prescribe environment reset 0: Off 1: On (65) Media type attributes Weight settings Fuser settings 1 to 28 (Not used: 18, 19, 20) 0: Light 0: High * : For details on settings, 1: Normal 1 1: Middle...
Page 155 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U000 Description Supplement (88) Data Sanitization information (89) Toner low setting 0: Enabled 1: Disabled (90) Toner low detection level 0 to 100 (%) (91) Drum serial number Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow Code conversion U001 Exiting the maintenance mode Description Exits the maintenance mode and return to the normal copy mode.
Page 156 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U002 Error codes Codes Description 0001 Entity error 0002 Controller error 0003 OS error 0020 Engine error 0040 Scanner error U003 Setting the service telephone number Description Sets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is detected. Purpose To set the telephone number to call service when installing the machine.
Page 157 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U004 Setting Carry out if the machine serial number does not match. 1. Select [Execute]. 2. Press the start key. Writing of serial No. starts. 3. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. Completion Press the stop key.
Page 158 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U019 Displaying the ROM version Description Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PWB. Purpose To check the part number or to decide, if the newest version of ROM is installed. Method 1. Press the start key. The ROM version are displayed. 2.
Page 159 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U019 Display Description Side PF Boot Side multi tray /Side deck booting SMT SSW Side multi tray multi feed sensor Side paper feeder / Side large capacity feeder ROM PF2 Boot Side paper feeder / Side large capacity feeder booting 4000-sheet finisher ROM DF Boot 4000-sheet finisher booting...
Page 160 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U021 Error codes Codes Description 0001 Entity error 0002 Controller error 0020 Engine error 0040 Scanner error U024 HDD formatting Description Initializes the hard disk. Purpose To initialize the hard disk when replacing the hard disk after shipping. Caution In addition, the following settings are also initialized by initializing the hard disk.
Page 161 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U026 Pulling Backup Data Description Perform restoring of the backup data.. Purpose Restores the setting values that was backed up in the flash memory from the HDD. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press [Execute]. 3.
Page 162 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U030 Checking the operation of the motors Description Drives each motor. Purpose To check the operation of each motor. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the motor to be operated. 3. Press the start key. The operation starts. Display Description Feed...
Page 163 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U031 Checking switches and sensors for paper conveying Description Displays the on-off status of each paper detection switch or sensor on the paper path. Purpose To check if the switches and sensors for paper conveying operate correctly. Method 1.
Page 164 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U032 Checking the operation of the clutches Description Turn each clutch on. Purpose To check the operation of each clutch. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the clutch to be operated. 3. Press the start key. The operation starts. Display Description Feed1...
Page 165 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U034 Adjusting the print start timing Description Adjusts the leading edge registration or center line. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original. Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
Page 166 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U034 [LSU Out Top B/W] [LSU Out Top 3/4] Setting Initial Change in Display Description range setting value per step MPT(L) Paper feed from MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0.1 mm Cassette(L) Paper feed from cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0.1 mm Duplex(L)
Page 167 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U034 Adjustment: Center line adjustment 1. Press the system menu key. 2. Press the start key to output a test pattern. 3. Press the system menu key. 4. Select the item to be adjusted. [LSU Out Left] Setting Initial Change in...
Page 168 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U035 Setting the printing area for folio paper Description Changes the printing area for copying on folio paper. Purpose To prevent cropped images on the trailing edge or left/right side of copy paper by setting the actual printing area for folio paper.
Page 169 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U037 Checking the operation of the fan motors Description Drives each fan motor. Purpose To check the operation of each fan motor. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the fan motor to be operated. 3.
Page 170 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U039 Adjusting the magnification Description Adjusts the magnification of the printing. Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect. Caution Adjust the magnification in the following order. U065 U070 U039 (P.1-3-52) (P.1-3-57) Method...
Page 171 2LB/2K9-4 Item No. Description U051 Adjusting the deflection in the paper Description Adjusts the deflection in the paper at the registration roller. Purpose Make the adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper is Z-folded.
Page 172 2LB/2K9-4 Item No. Description U051 [Paper Loop Amount B/W] Initial setting Setting Display Description range 65ppm 75ppm MPT(L) Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20 Cassette(L) Paper feed from cassette -30 to 20 Duplex(L) Duplex mode (second) -30 to 20 MPT(S) Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20...
Page 173 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U052 Setting the fuser motor control Description Enters the sensor data values described on the supplied sheet provided when the loop sensor is replaced and Perform correction processing for the fuser motor. Purpose To perform when replacing the loop sensor or paper conveying unit. Method 1.
Page 174 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U053 Setting the adjustment of the motor speed Description Perform fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors. Purpose Basically, the setting need not be changed. Modify settings by interlock setting only if faulty images occur. Method 1.
Page 175 2LB/2K9-4 Item No. Description U053 Setting: [Motor1] 1. Select the item to be adjusted. Initial setting Setting Display Description range 65ppm 75ppm Drum(C) Drum motor C (DRM-C) -5000 to 5000 8 Drum(M) Drum motor M (DRM-M) -5000 to 5000 0 Drum(Y) Drum motor Y (DRM-Y) -5000 to 5000 0...
Page 176 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U053 Setting: [Motor4] 1. Select the item to be adjusted. Initial setting Setting Display Description range 65ppm 75ppm Drum B/ Drum motor K (DRM-K) in -5000 to 5000 - W(K)* black/white mode Drum Drum motor K (DRM-K) in -5000 to 5000 - Mono(K) monochrome mode...
Page 177 2LB/2K9-4 Item No. Description U053 Setting: [Motor6] 1. Select the item to be adjusted. Setting Initial Display Description range setting SB B/W Eject motor (EM) in black/white mode -5000 to 5000 Fixing B/W Fuser motor (FUM) in black/white mode -5000 to 5000 Decal B/W Decal motor (BRDM) in black/white mode -5000 to 5000 Bridge1...
Page 178 2LB/2K9-4 Item No. Description U053 Setting: [Motor3 Half] Select the item to be adjusted. Initial setting Setting Display Description range 65ppm 75ppm -5000 to 5000 0 Eject motor (EM) in half speed -5000 to 5000 -56 Fixing Fuser motor (FUM) in half speed -5000 to 5000 0 Decal Decal motor (BRDM) in half speed...
Page 179 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U053 Setting Initial Display Description range setting Regist Registration motor (RM) at 3/4 times of -5000 to 5000 line speed Belt Clean Transfer cleaning motor (TRCM) at 3/4 -5000 to 5000 times of line speed Setting: [Motor3 3/4] 1.
Page 180 2LB/2K9-3 Item No. Description U059 Setting fan mode Description Specifies mode for developer fan motors. Purpose Handling the lowering density [to suppress thermal stresses owing to the heated toner] Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the mode. Display Description Fan Mode Sets threshold temperature at which developer fan motors oper-...
Page 181 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U061 Checking the operation of the exposure lamp Description Lights the exposure lamp. Purpose To check whether the exposure lamp are turned on. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. Display Description The exposure lamp lights The CIS lights 3.
Page 182 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification Description Adjusts the magnification of the original scanning. Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is incorrect. Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect. Caution The magnification adjustment along the main scanning direction could cause black streaks depending on the content of the original document.
Page 183 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U065 Adjustment: [Sub Scan] 1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value. Increasing the value makes the image longer, while decreasing the value makes the image shorter.
Page 184 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U066 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration Description Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration of the original scanning. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
Page 185 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U067 Adjusting the scanner center line Description Adjusts the scanner center line of the original scanning. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original. Adjustment 1.
Page 186 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP Description Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP. Perform the test copy at the four scanning positions after adjusting. Purpose Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used.
Page 187 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U070 Adjusting the DP magnification Description Adjusts the DP original scanning speed. Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the DP is used. Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the main scanning direction when the CIS is used.
Page 188 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U070 Adjustment: [Main Scan] 1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value. Increasing the setting enlarges the image and decreasing it narrows the image. Copy Original Copy...
Page 189 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing Description Adjusts the DP original scanning timing. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the origi- nal and the copy image when the DP is used. Method 1.
Page 190 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U071 Adjustment: Leading edge registration 1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value. Increasing the value moves the image forward and decreasing the value moves the image backward.
Page 191 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U072 Adjusting the DP center line Description Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when the DP is used. Adjustment 1.
Page 192 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U073 Checking the scanner operation Description Simulates the scanner operation under the arbitrary conditions. Purpose To check the scanner operation. This is also done to check the accumulation of dust on the slit glass. Method 1. Press the start key. 2.
Page 193 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U073 Method: [Home Position] 1. Select [Home Position]. 2. Press the start key. The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the home position. Method: [Dust Check] 1. Select [Dust Check]. 2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights. 3.
Page 194 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation Description The presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing the scan data of the original trailing edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DP original scanning position. If dust is identified, the DP original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals.
Page 195 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern Description Selects and outputs the MIP-PG pattern created in the machine. Purpose To check copier status other than scanner when adjusting image printing, using MIP-PG pattern output (with-out scanning). Method 1. Press the start key. 2.
Page 196 2LB/2K9-4 Item No. Description U091 Setting the white line correction Description Sets the error detection threshold value for white line correction and displays the count result of abnormal pixels. Purpose To perform when replacing the CIS, DP main PWB or CIS roller. Method 1.
Page 197 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U091 How to view test copies blank sheet black band Causes Corrective measures No lines No lines Complete Black lines White lines Dirty CIS roller or CIS Clean CIS roller or CIS glass glass and then perform U091 again Black lines No lines Engine side...
Page 198 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U099 Adjusting original size detection Description Checks the operation of the original size detection and sets the sensing threshold value. Purpose Modify the threshold of detection if documents are frequently mal-detected in size after scanning a wholly dark document or a document enclosed with dark objects on edges. Method 1.
Page 199 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U099 Setting: [B/W Level1] 1. Select an item to be set. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.l Setting Initial Display Description range setting* Original R1 Original threshold value for color R (near side) 0 to 255 20/50 Original R2...
Page 200 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U100 Adjusting main high voltage Description Controls the charger roller voltage to optimize the surface potential. Purpose To change the setting value to adjust the image if an image failure (background blur, etc.) occurs. Method 1. Press the start key. 2.
Page 201 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U100 Displaying: [Set DC Bias] 1. The current setting is displayed. Display Description DC1 Bias(C) Main charger DC bias for cyan (full speed) DC1 Bias Half(C) Main charger DC bias for cyan (half speed) DC1 Bias(M) Main charger DC bias for magenta (full speed) DC1 Bias Half(M) Main charger DC bias for magenta (half speed)
Page 202 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U100 Setting: [Set Charger Freq] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.ll Initial setting Setting Display Description range 65ppm 75ppm 8745 9161 Generally Main charger frequency 7500 to 11280 8745...
Page 203 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U101 Setting the voltage for the primary transfer Description Sets the control voltage for the primary transfer. Purpose To change the setting when any density problems, such as too dark or light, occur. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2.
Page 204 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U101 [Normal]l Setting Initial Display Description range setting Addition value (cyan) -127 to 127 Addition value (magenta) -127 to 127 Addition value (black) -127 to 127 [Heavy 4/5]l Setting Initial Display Description range setting Addition value (cyan) -127 to 127 Addition value (magenta) -127 to 127...
Page 205 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U101 [Heavy 4/5] Initial setting Setting Display Description range 65ppm 75ppm Addition value for the second -127 to side (cyan) Addition value for the second -127 to side (magenta) Addition value for the second -127 to side (yellow) Addition value for the second -127 to...
Page 206 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U106 Setting the voltage for the secondary transfer Description Sets the control voltage for the secondary transfer depending on each paper type. Purpose To change the setting when any density problems, such as too dark or light, occur. Method 1.
Page 207 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U106 [1st] Initial setting Setting Display Description range 65ppm 75ppm Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 [2nd] Initial setting Setting Display Description range 65ppm...
Page 208 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U106 Setting: [Normal2/3] 1. Select the item to be set. Display Description Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side (full speed) Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side (full speed) 1st 3/4(Gloss) Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side at 3/4 times of line speed...
Page 209 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U106 [2nd 3/4(Gloss)] Initial setting Setting Display Description range 65ppm 75ppm Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 [1st B/W] Initial setting Setting Display Description...
Page 210 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U106 [2nd 3/4] Initial setting Setting Display Description range 65ppm 75ppm Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 4. Press the start key. The value is set. Setting: [Heavy2/3] 1.
Page 211 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U106 [1st Half] Initial setting Setting Display Description range 65ppm 75ppm Width=105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 Width=210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 Width=297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 [2nd Half] Initial setting Setting Display Description...
Page 212 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U106 Setting: [Bias] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys. Initial setting Setting Display Description range 65ppm 75ppm Reverse Transfer reverse bias 0 to 255 (full speed) Reverse Transfer reverse bias 0 to 255...
Page 213 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U107 Setting the transfer cleaning voltage Description Sets the cleaning control voltage for transfer belt unit. Purpose Change settings if an offset has occurred due to the failure of cleaning the transfer belt. Method 1. Press the start key. 2.
Page 214 2LB/2K9-4 Item No. Description U108 Setting separation shift bias Description Adjusts output of separation shift bias and ON/OFF timing. Purpose To set when the separated malfunction of the paper occurs. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. Display Description Output...
Page 215 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U108 Setting: [Output 3/4 / Output B/W] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric key. Initial setting Setting Display Description range Output Output B/W* Light 1st Separation shift bias for the first side on 0 to 255 paper with thickness 52 to 64 g/m...
Page 216 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U110 Checking the drum count Description Displays the drum counts for checking. Purpose To check the drum status. Method 1. Press the start key. The current drum counts is displayed. Display Description Drum count value for cyan Drum count value for magenta Drum count value for yellow Drum count value for black...
Page 217 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U117 Checking the drum number Description Displays the drum number. Purpose To check the drum number. Method 1. Press the start key. The drum number is displayed. Display Description Cyan drum number Magenta drum number Yellow drum number Black drum number Completion Press the stop key.
Page 218 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U119 Setting the drum Description Sets drum sensitivity. Purpose To set the drum after replacing the drum unit or laser scanner unit. When completed, perform maintenance mode U464, Calibration. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select [Execute]. 3.
Page 219 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U127 Checking/clearing the transfer count Description Displays and clears the counts of the transfer counter. Purpose To check the count or drive time after replacement of the transfer belt unit or transfer roller. Also to clear the counts after replacing transfer roller. Method 1.
Page 220 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U128 Setting transfer high-voltage timing Description Adjusts the ON/OFF timing of transfer high-voltage output. Purpose Basically, the setting need not be changed. If any problem such as faulty images or dirt on the back surface occurs, change the setting. Method 1.
Page 221 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U130 Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U131 Adjusting the toner sensor control voltage Description Adjusts the toner sensor control voltage. Purpose If control values are not correctly retrievable due to the EEPROM of the developer unit failure, etc., use manual adjustment and obtain a temporary control value.
Page 222 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U131 Setting: [Mode] 1. Select the item to be set. Display Description Manual Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment Auto Toner sensor control voltage auto adjustment Initial setting: Auto 2. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key.
Page 223 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U135 Checking toner motor operation Description Drives toner motors. Purpose To check the operation of toner motors. Remarks When driving the toner motors long time or several times, developer section becomes the toner full and is locked. Method 1.
Page 224 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U139 Displaying the temperature and humidity outside the machine Description Displays the detected temperature and humidity outside the machine. Purpose To check the temperature and humidity outside the machine. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. Display Description Ext/Int...
Page 225 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U140 Displaying developer bias Description Displays and changes various developer bias value. Purpose To check or changes the developer bias value. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. Display Description Sleeve DC Developer sleeve roller DC bias Sleeve AC...
Page 226 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U140 Setting: [Sleeve AC] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Initial setting Setting Display Description range 65ppm 75ppm Developer sleeve roller AC bias 0 to 255 for cyan Developer sleeve roller AC bias...
Page 227 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U140 Setting: [Mag AC] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Initial setting Setting Display Description range 65ppm 75ppm Developer magnet roller AC bias 0 to 255 for cyan Developer magnet roller AC bias...
Page 228 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U140 Setting: [Mag Duty] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Initial setting Setting Display Description range 65ppm 75ppm Normal Developer magnet roller duty 0 to 99 B/W* Developer magnet roller duty in...
Page 229 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U140 Setting: [Magnification] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Setting Initial Display Description range setting When replacing the developer unit C or drum unit C -10 to 15 When replacing the developer unit M or drum unit M -10 to 15 When replacing the developer unit Y or drum unit Y -10 to 15...
Page 230 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U147 Setting for toner applying operation Description Sets the mode for removing charged toner in the developing unit (T7 control: Toner applying operation). Defines the action that the toner accumulated on the developer blade is sent back in the developer unit (done by the vibration motor).
Page 231 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U147 Setting: [Interval Number] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Setting Initial Display Description range setting Print(Normal) During continuous printing (Normal environ- 10 to 500 ment) Print(H/H) During continuous printing (High humidity...
Page 232 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U155 Checking sensors for toner Description Displays the toner sensor output value. Purpose To check the output value for each color when any image problems occur. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be display. Display Description Waste Toner...
Page 233 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U156 Setting the toner replenishment level Description Sets the toner replenishment level for each color. Purpose To change settings according to the original image. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. Display Description Supply...
Page 234 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U157 Checking the developer drive time Description Displays the developer drive time for checking a figure, which is used as a reference when cor- recting the toner control. Purpose To check the developer drive time after replacing the developer unit. Method 1.
Page 235 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U161 Setting the fuser control temperature Description Changes the fuser control temperature. Purpose Normally no change is necessary. However, can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper, or solve a fuser problem on thick paper. Method 1.
Page 236 2LB/2K9-4 Item No. Description U161 Setting: [Print] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys. Initial setting Setting Display Description range 65ppm 75ppm Full Speed Temperature at maximum 130 to 200 Print(Center) print speed (Center) (°C) Duplex Shift...
Page 237 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U167 Checking/clearing the fuser count Description Displays and clears the fuser count for checking. Purpose To check the fuser count or drive time after replacement of the fuser unit. Also to clear the counts after replacing unit. Method 1.
Page 238 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U169 Checking/setting the fuser power source Description Displays and settings the reference voltage of the fuser IH PWB. Purpose To check the reference voltage. * : When U021 is being executed, set the same voltage with the voltage of the IH control PWB.
Page 239 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U200 Turning all LEDs on Description Turn all the LEDs on the operation panel on. Purpose To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select [Execute]. 3.
Page 240 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system Description Initializes or operates the KMAS host monitoring system. This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines, so no setting is necessary. Purpose Performed at installation, periodic maintenance, and/or repair.
Page 241 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U203 Checking DP operation Description Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the DP. Purpose To check the DP operation. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper. 3.
Page 242 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter Description Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter. Purpose To run this maintenance item if a key card or key counter is installed. Method 1.
Page 243 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U206 Setting the presence or absence of a coin vender Description Sets the presence or absence of the optional coin vender. This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines. Purpose To run this maintenance item if a coin vender is installed.
Page 244 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U206 Setting: [Price] 1. Select the item to be set. Display Description Normal Charge setting: Normal Charge setting: Commercial Print Charge setting: Print Setting: [Normal / AD] 1. Select the item to be set. Display Description Black &...
Page 245 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U206 3. Change the setting value using the +/- keys. Initial setting Setting Display Description range CMY/RGB Full Color A3-Ledger A3/Ledger size 0 to 300 B4 size 0 to 300 Card Post card 0 to 300 Other Other 0 to 300...
Page 246 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U208 Setting the paper size for the side deck Description Sets the size of paper used in side deck. Purpose To change the setting when installing the side deck or the size of paper used in the side deck is changed.
Page 247 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U222 Setting the IC card type Description Sets the type of IC card. Purpose To change the type of IC card. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. Display Description Other Sets the type of IC cards to other than SSFC SSFC Sets the type of IC cards to SSFC Initial setting: Other...
Page 248 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U223 Operation panel lock Description Sets the operation panel lock function. Purpose This is performed to inhibit operating and canceling the system menu on the operation panel which may be done by others then an administrator. Setting 1.
Page 249 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U224 Panel sheet extension Description Changes the image data and the message of the opening screen at the machine startup and the image data and the message of the service call screen to user specified data. Purpose Set according to the preference of the user.
Page 250 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U224 Supplement 2 Displaying start display The pre-installed graphics file is displayed at power on or recovering from sleeping. Graphics display on service call display The pre-installed graphics file is displayed at a service call. How to change the message Entering #562 (4 letters) using the numeric keypad during a service call display will let service call messages 1 and 2.
Page 251 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U237 Setting finisher stack quantity Description Sets the number of sheets of each stack on the main tray and on the middle tray in 4000-sheet finisher. Purpose To change the setting when a stack malfunction has occurred. Method 1.
Page 252 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U240 Checking the operation of the finisher Description Turn each motor and solenoid of 4000-sheet finisher ON. Purpose To check the operation of each motor and solenoid of the 4000-sheet finisher. Method 1. Press the start key. 2.
Page 253 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U240 Display Description Eject Unlock(50) DF eject release motor (DFERM) drive position 50-sheet stack Eject Unlock(Fix) DF eject release motor (DFERM) fixed drive position Eject Unlock(Full) DF eject release motor (DFERM) full-open drive position Punch Punch motor (PUM) is turned on Punch Move Punch slide motor (PUSLM) is turned on Method: [Solenoid]...
Page 254 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U241 Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher Description Displays the status of each switches and sensors of 4000-sheet finisher. Purpose To check the operation of each switches and sensors of the 4000-sheet finisher. Method 1.
Page 255 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U241 Display Description Match Paddle DF adjustment sensor (DFADS) Lead Paddle DF paddle sensor (DFPDS) Shift Front HP DF shift sensor 1 (DFSFS1) Shift Tail HP DF shift sensor 2 (DFSFS2) Shift Unlock HP DF shift release sensor (DFSFRS) Sub Tray Full DF sub tray full sensor (DFSTFS) Shift Set...
Page 256 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U241 Method: [Booklet] 1. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status. When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected, that switch or sensor is displayed in reverse. Display Description CF paper entry sensor (CFPES) Eject...
Page 257 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors Description Turn the motors or solenoids in the DP on. Purpose To check the operation of the DP motors and solenoids. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be operated. 3.
Page 258 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U244 Checking the DP switches Description Displays the status of the respective switches and sensors in the DP. Purpose To check if respective switches and sensors in the DP operate correctly. Method 1. Press the start key. 2.
Page 259: Checking Messages
2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U245 Checking messages Description Displays a list of messages on the touch panel of the operation panel. Purpose To check the messages to be displayed. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Change the message using the cursor up/down keys. When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed, the message corresponding the specified number is displayed.
Page 260 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U246 Setting the finisher Description Provides various settings for the 4000-sheet finisher, if furnished. Purpose Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode Adjust if skewed paper conveying occurs or if the copy paper is Z-folded in punch mode. Adjustment of paper stop timing in the punch mode To adjust this item when the position of a punch hole is different from the specified one.
Page 261 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U246 Setting: [Punch Regist] 1. Select [Punch Regist]. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Adjustment of registration stop timing -20 to 20 0.25 mm If skewed paper conveying occurs (sample 1), increase the setting value.
Page 262 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U246 Setting: [Punch Width] 1. Select [Punch Width]. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Adjustment of the punch center position timing -4 to 4 0.52 mm * : If the punch hole is too close to the front of the machine, increase the setting value.
Page 263 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U246 Setting: [Staple HP] 1. Select [Staple HP]. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Adjustment of front and back stapling home position -15 to 15 0.19 mm * : When staple positions are off toward the front side of the machine (sample 1), increase the setting value.
Page 264 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U246 Setting: [Width Up HP/Width Down HP] 1. Select [Width Up HP] or [Width Down HP]. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Adjustment of upper side registration home position -15 to 15 0.34 mm Adjustment of lower side registration home position...
Page 265 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U246 Setting: [Booklet Pos] 1. Select [Booklet Pos1], [Booklet Pos2] or [Booklet Pos3]. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size -15 to 15 0 0.32 mm Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size...
Page 266 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U247 Setting the paper feed device Description Turn on motor and clutches of paper feeder device. Purpose To check the operation of motor and clutches of paper feed device. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the paper feed device. Display Description Large capacity feeder...
Page 267 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U247 Method: [Side Deck] 1. Press [Motor] or [Device] and select the item. Display Description Motor SF paper feed motor (SFPFM) is turned off SF paper feed motor (SFPFM) is turned on Device C1 Clutch SF paper conveying clutch (SFPCCL) is turned on Cassette1 Solenoid SF pickup solenoid (PFPUSOL) is turned on 2.
Page 268 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U247 Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U249 Finisher operation test Description Perform operating tests on the 4000-sheet finisher. Purpose To check the operation of the 4000-sheet finisher. Method 1.
Page 269 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U250 Checking/clearing the maintenance cycle Description Changes preset values for maintenance cycle and automatic grayscale adjustment. Purpose Provides changing the time when the message to acknowledge to conduct maintenance and automatic grayscale adjustment is periodically displayed. Setting 1.
Page 270 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance counter Description Displays and clears or changes the maintenance count and automatic grayscale adjustment count. Purpose To verify the maintenance counter count and automatic grayscale count. Also to clear the count during maintenance service. Setting 1.
Page 271 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U252 Setting the destination Description Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination. Purpose To be executed after initializing the backup RAM, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization.
Page 272 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U253 Switching between double and single counts Description Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters for every color mode. Purpose Used to select, according to the preference of the user (copy service provider), if A3/Ledger paper is to be counted as one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count).
Page 273 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting Description Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters. Purpose To be set according to user request. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the copy count timing. Display Description Feed...
Page 274 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U271 Setting the page count Description Banner counting Purpose To change when modifying counting Banner * : If U253 is adjusted to double-counting, the value which is multiplied with this value will be the count value. Setting 1.
Page 275 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U278 Setting the delivery date Description Enter delivery date in month, day, and year. Purpose To operate when installing the machine. Perform this to confirm the delivery date. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select [Today]. 3.
Page 276 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U285 Setting service status page Description Determines displaying the print coverage report on reporting. Purpose According to user request, changes the setting. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select On or Off. Display Description Displays the print coverage Not to display the print coverage Initial setting: On 3.
Page 277 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U325 Setting the paper interval Description Due to the fact that, if toner consumption per driving time drastically lowers, the variation in color- ing and low density and gray background become prominent, the print coverage that executes toner ejection according to the low density at a continued vertical printing with the low coverage data must be changed.
Page 278 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication Description Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line. Purpose Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease by the rubbish on the contact glass when scanning from the DP.
Page 279 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U327 Setting the cassette heater control Description Sets the cassette heater control. Purpose To change the setting according to the machine installation environment. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to set. Display Description Mode1 Setting On when the humidity is 65%.
Page 280 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U332 Setting the size conversion factor Description Rate: Setting a factor to convert a non-standard size paper to A4/Letter. The coefficient set here is used to convert the black ratio in relation to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in user simulation.
Page 281 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U332 1. Select the item. 2. Change the setting using the +/-keys or numeric keys. Display Description Setting range Initial setting Level 1 Low coverage threshold value 0.1 to 99.8 Level 2 Middle coverage threshold value 0.1 to 99.9 3.
Page 282 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U340 Setting: [Adj Max Job] 1. Change the setting using the +/-keys or numeric keys. Setting Initial Display Description range setting Copy Maximum copy (Scan To Print) Jobs 10 to 50 Printer Maximum printer (Host To Print) Jobs 10 to 50 * : The maximum Printer jobs should be (maximum jobs) –...
Page 283 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode Description Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy. Purpose To be set according to frequency of use: set to the more frequently used mode. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2.
Page 284 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U402 Adjusting margins of image printing Description Adjusts margins for image printing. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect. Adjustment 1. Press the start key. 2. Press the system menu key. 3. Press the start key to output a test pattern. 4.
Page 285 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original on the contact glass. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect. Adjustment 1. Press the start key. 2.
Page 286 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect. Adjustment 1. Press the start key. 2. Press the system menu key. 3.
Page 287 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U404 Caution If the above adjustment does not optimize the margins, perform the following maintenance modes. U039 U034 U402 U403 U404 (P.1-3-40) (P.1-3-35) (P.1-3-154) (P.1-3-155) Completion Press the stop key. * : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 1-3-157...
Page 288 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing Description Adjusts the leading edge registration during memory copying. Purpose Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy image on the front face and that on the reverse face during duplex switchback copying.
Page 289 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically Description Carries out processing for the data acquisition that is required in order to perform either auto- matic adjustment of the halftone or the ID correction operation. Purpose Performed when the quality of reproduced halftones has dropped. Modify the color table settings if the fidelity of characters is to be improved.
Page 290 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U410 Method: [Setting Table] 1. Select the item. Display Description Table1 Normal color table Table2 Color tables for improving reproduction of characters at black and white printing Table3 More fidelity than Table2 Initial setting: Table1 2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key.
Page 291 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically Description Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections. Purpose To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections. Perform adjustments using a new test chart (chart 1) when replacing ISC PWB, LED lamp PWB, ISU, CIS and/or DP main PWB.
Page 292 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U411 To automatically enter the target value 1. Enter the value for [Adjust Original] using maintenance item U425. 2. Set a specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the platen. 3. Enter maintenance item U411. 4. Select [Target]. 5.
Page 293 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U411 Display Description Input Executing the adjustment for input gamma and matrix 8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. * : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin- ning.
Page 294 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U411 Method: [Table (Chart2)] 1. Enter the target values which are shown on the back of the specified original (P/N: 302FZ56990) executing maintenance item U425. 2. Set a specified original on the platen. 3. Enter maintenance item U411. 4.
Page 295 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U411 8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. * : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin- ning.
Page 296 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U411 * : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the begin- ning.
Page 297 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U411 Error Codes Codes Description DP uxiliary scanning direction skew error Maintenance request error Main scanning direction center line error DP main scanning direction skew error Main scanning direction magnification error Service call error DP paper misfeed error PWB replacement error Original error Input gamma adjustment original error...
Page 298 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U412 Adjusting the uneven density Description Adjusts the uneven developer/transfer density in the drum axis direction by scanning directly the density distribution of test pattern with the scanner and adjusting LSU light quantity. Purpose To perform when replacing the drum unit or laser scanner unit. When completed, perform maintenance mode U464, Calibration.
Page 299 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U412 Error codes Codes Description Codes Description S001 Patch not detected E001 Engine status error S002 Original deviation in the main E002 Spotted background error scanning direction E003 Density error S003 Original deviation in the auxil- E004 Uneven density error iary scanning direction...
Page 300 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U415 Adjusting the print position automatically Description Automatically adjusts timings at the print engine. Adjustment for leading edge timing, center line and margin. Purpose Used to make respective auto adjustments for the print engine. Method 1. Load A3/ledger paper. Load A4/Letter when the large capacity feeder is used.
Page 301 2LB/2K9-3 Item No. Description U425 Setting the target Description Enters the lab values that is indicated of the chart 1 (P/N: 7505000005) or chart 2 (P/N: 302FZ56990) used for adjustment. Purpose Perform data input in order to correct for differences in originals during automatic adjustment. Method 1.
Page 302 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U425 Setting: [Adjust Original] 1. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A, B and C. Measurement procedure 1) Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A (30 mm from the left edge), B (148.5 mm from the left edge) and C (267 mm from the left edge), respectively.
Page 303 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U425 Method: [Chart2] 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. Display Description Entering the target values of the chart (P/N: 302FZ56990) used for adjustment Entering the measurement value of the chart (P/N: 302AC68243) used for adjustment Execution is not required Method: [CCD] 1.
Page 304 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U425 Setting: [Adjust Original] 1. Measure the distance from the left edge to the black belt (a) of the original at A, B and C. Measurement procedure 1) Measure the distance from the edge to the black belt (a) of the original at A (30 mm from the leading edge), B (148.5 mm from the leading edge) and C (267 mm from the leading edge), respectively.
Page 305 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U425 Setting: [DP] 1. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the black belt (inside) of the original at A. 2. Enter the measured value using the +/- keys in [Lead]. 3. Measure the distance from the left edge to the black belt (inside) of the original at B. 4.
Page 306 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U429 Setting the offset for the color balance Description Displays and changes the density for each color during copying in the various image quality modes. Purpose To change the balance for each color. Method 1. Press the start key. 2.
Page 307 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U460 Adjusting the conveying sensor Description Compensates the threshold value of the side multi tray’s multi feed sensor. Purpose If more than one sheet is fed at a time, modify the threshold depending on the environment. Method 1.
Page 308 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U460 Setting: [On/Off Config] 1. Select On or Off. Display Description Paper conveying sensor is enabled Paper conveying sensor is disabled Initial setting: Off 2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop key. * : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
Page 309 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U464 Setting the ID correction operation Description Turn ID correction (calibration) on or off. Also, this allows individual settings for calibration opera- tion. Purpose Implements various settings of calibration when poor image quality is caused or to allow various settings of calibration depending on the user preference.
Page 310 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U464 Setting: [Permission] 1. Select On or Off. Display Description Turn calibration ON Turn calibration OFF Initial setting: On 2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting: [Time Interval] 1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Setting Initial Display...
Page 311 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U464 Setting: [AP/NE] 1. Select On or Off. Display Description Paper interval calibration at the time of calibration/near end after toner feed is carried out Paper interval calibration at the time of calibration/near end after toner feed is not carried out Initial setting: On 2.
Page 312 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U464 Setting: [Target Value] 1. Select the item. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Initial setting Setting Display Description range 65ppm 75ppm 0 to 1000 910 Thick- Toner thick layer calibration ness(C) (cyan) 0 to 1000 890...
Page 313 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U464 Completion Press the stop key. * : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U465 Data reference for ID correction Description References the data related to ID correction. Purpose To check the corresponding data. Method 1.
Page 314 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U465 Displaying: [Bias Calib] 1. Select [Bias Calib]. The current value is displayed. Display Description Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (cyan) Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (magenta) Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (yellow) Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (black) Displaying: [T7 CTD] 1.
Page 315 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U467 Setting the color registration adjustment Description Sets the color registration adjustment and transfer belt speed correction. Also, determines the conditions by which color registration correction is executed depending on the LSU temperature. Purpose If color variance is uneven due to a sensor failure, etc., turn this off and temporarily make a man- ual adjustment.
Page 316 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U468 Checking the color registration data Description Displays the color registration correction data and transfer belt speed correction data. Purpose To check the corresponding data. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be reference. Display Description V Correction...
Page 317 2LB/2K9-3 Item No. Description U468 Completion Press the stop key. * : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U469 Adjusting the color registration Description Perform the color registration correction and transfer belt speed correction. Purpose To perform when replacing the transfer belt unit or laser scanner unit. Method * : Before executing this mode, be sure to execute U464 Calib.
Page 318 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U469 Error codes Codes Description Codes Description S001 Patch not detected S004 Original inclination error S002 Original deviation in the main S005 Original type error scanning direction SFFF Scanner other error S003 Original deviation in the auxil- E001 Engine state error iary scanning direction...
Page 319 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U469 Method: [Belt Initialize] 1. Select [Execute]. 2. Press the start key. Transfer belt speed correction starts. Method:[Belt Check] 1. Select [Mode]. 2. Select [Color] or [B/W]. Display Description Angle Display of cam position Belt Position Display of belt position Mode Operational mode...
Page 320 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U470 Setting the JPEG compression ratio Description Sets the compression ratio for JPEG images in each image quality mode. Purpose To change the setting in accordance with the image that the user is copying. For example, in order to soften the coarseness of the image when making copies at over 200% magnification, change the level of compression by raising the value.
Page 321 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U470 Setting: [Send] 1. Select the item to be set. Display Description Photo Compression ratio in the photo mode Text Compression ratio in the text mode HC-PDF (BG) Compression ratio of high compression PDF HC-PDF (Char) Setting the compression rate of the high-compression PDF (text color) 2.
Page 322 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U470 Setting: [System] 1. Select the item to be set. 2. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys. Setting Initial Display Description range setting Compression ratio of brightness 1 to 100 CbCr Compression ratio of color differential 1 to 100 3.
Page 323 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U474 Setting: [Timing] 1. Select the item. Display Description Print Execute during a Job Print End Execute after a Job has been completed 2. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. * : The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
Page 324 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U485 Setting: [PDF Rotation] 1. Change the setting value using +/- keys or numeric keys. Display Description Assigns the image rotation with the internal parameter Assigns the image rotation with the actual image Assigns the image rotation with the internal parameter (CTM rotation) Initial setting: 0 2.
Page 325 2LB/2K9-4 Item No. Description U485 Setting: [Uninstall] 1. The color table currently being installed is displayed. 2. Select the color table you want to uninstall, then press the Start key. * : You can select more than one file to simultaneously uninstall them. Completion Press the stop key.
Page 326 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U486 Setting color/black and white operation mode Description When color and B/W documents are mixed, sets operation mode after a color document is detected. Purpose To ensure productivity when copying color and B/W documents in ACS mode, select Mode3. However, selecting Mode3 will increase the maintenance count for cyan, magenta, and yellow color developer units even when there is a B/W original after a color original.
Page 327 2LB/2K9-4 Item No. Description U486 [Setting: Permission] 1. Press the start key. 2. Select On or Off Display Description Permission: monochrome printing * 1 (3 colors release) Prohibition: color printing (4-color press) Initial setting: Off * : When the background of printing on envelope is colored, set On. If perform it, there is a possibility that the jitter occurs.
Page 328 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U520 Set TDRS Description Perform TDRS settings and information views. Purpose Perform TDRS settings and information views. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. Display Description Registration Transition to the TDRS Manager registering dialog Information Transition to the Device Agent description dialog On/Off Config...
Page 329 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U520 Error Codes Codes Description Codes Description e0001 t0001 HDD is unavailable. Fatal error. e0002 t0002 USB memory is unavailable. Error in processing the network. e0003 t0003 The file to import does not exist in An illegal parameter error. the USB.
Page 330 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U901 Checking copy counts by paper feed locations Description Displays or clears paper feed counts by paper feed locations. Perform backup when the counters on the engine PWB and PF main PWB do not match. Purpose To check the time to replace consumable parts.
Page 331 2LB/2K9-4 Item No. Description U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts Description Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations. Purpose To check the paper jam status. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts. Method 1. Press the start key. 2.
Page 332: Maintenance Report
2LB/2K9-4 Item No. Description U903 Detail of history of paper jams Maintenance Report 17/Apr/2011 08:40 Firmware version 2K9_2000.000.000 2011.04.17 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] Machine No.: SPXXX00001 Life Count : 001234 Paper Jam Log 2011.12.12 JAM0000 JAM0100 JAM0101 JAM0110 JAM0111 JAM0112 JAM0131 JAM0210 Figure 1-3-37 Description...
Page 333 2LB/2K9-4 Item No. Description U904 Checking/clearing the call for service counts Description Displays or clears the service call code counts by types. Purpose To check the service call code status by types. Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing consumable parts. Method 1.
Page 334 2LB/2K9-4 Item No. Description U904 Detail of history of service counts Maintenance Report 17/Apr/2011 08:40 Firmware version 2K9_2000.000.000 2011.04.17 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] Machine No.: SPXXX00001 Life Count : 001234 Paper Jam Log 2011.12.12 JAM0000 Service Call Log 2011.12.12 C0630 C1000 C1950 C2840 C4300...
Page 335 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U905 Checking counts by optional devices Description Displays the counts of DP, 4000-sheet finisher. Purpose To check the use of DP, 4000-sheet finisher. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked. The count of the selected device is displayed.
Page 336 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U906 Resetting partial operation control Description Resets the service call code for partial operation control. Purpose To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the cassettes or other sec- tions, and the related parts are serviced. Method 1.
Page 337 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U911 Checking copy counts by paper sizes Description Displays the paper feed counts by paper sizes. Purpose To check the counts after replacing consumable parts. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed. Display Display Description...
Page 338 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U917 Setting backup data reading/writing Description Retrieves the backup data to a USB memory from the machine; or writes the data from the USB memory to the machine. Purpose To store and write data when replacing the HDD. Method 1.
Page 339 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U917 Error Codes Codes Description Codes Description e002 Parameter error e31e User managements error e003 File write error e31f User managements open error e004 File initialization error e320 User managements error e005 File error e321 User managements open error e006 Processing error e322...
Page 340 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description Error Codes Codes Description Codes Description e913 Log file open error d008 File rename error e914 Log file error in writing d009 File open error e915 Directory open error d00a File close error e916 Directory error in reading d00b File reading error e917...
Page 341 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U920 Checking the copy counts Description Checks the copy counts. Purpose To check the copy counts. Method 1. Press the start key. The current counts are displayed. Display Description Color Copy(H) Count value of full color copy (coverage: high) Color Copy(M) Count value of full color copy (coverage: middle) Color Copy(L)
Page 342 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U928 Checking machine life counts Description Displays the machine life counts. Purpose To check the machine life counts. Method 1. Press the start key. The current machine life counts is displayed. Display Description Machine life counts Completion Press the stop key.
Page 343 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP Description Adjusts the deflection generated when the document processor is used. Purpose Use this mode if an original non-feed jam, oblique feed or wrinkling of original occurs when the document processor is used.
Page 344 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U952 Maintenance mode workflow Description The maintenance modes configured in the machine or a USB flash device as a workflow must be executed in succession. Purpose This allows maintenance mode to be preset as a template. Setting 1.
Page 345 2LB/2K9-2 Item No. Description U952 Method: [Execute(USB)] 1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the main power indicator has gone off, switch off the main power switch. 2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot. 3.
Page 346 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U964 Checking of log Description Sends a log file saved on the HDD to a USB memory. Purpose To transfer a log file saved on the HDD to a USB memory as a means of investigating malfunc- tions.
Page 347 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U964 Error codes Display Description No Usb Storage USB memory is not inserted No File File is not found Mount Error USB memory mount error File Delete Error File deletion error Copy Error File copy error Unmount Error USB memory unmount error Other Error...
Page 348 2LB/2K9-5 Item No. Description U977 Data capture mode Description Store the print data sent to the machine into USB memory. Purpose In case to occur the error at printing, check the print data sent to the machine. Method 1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the main power indicator has gone off, switch off the main power switch.
Page 349 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U985 Displaying the developer unit history Description Displays the past record of machine number and the developer counter. Purpose To check the count value of machine number and the developer counter. Method 1. Press the start key. 2.
Page 350 2LB/2K9 Item No. Description U990 Checking the time for the exposure lamp to light Description Displays the accumulated time for the CIS to light. Purpose To check duration of use of the CIS. Method 1. Press the start key. The accumulated time for the CIS to light is displayed in minutes. Display Description The accumulated time for the CIS to light...
Page 351: Paper Misfeed Detection
2LB/2K9 1-4 Troubleshooting 1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection (1) Paper misfeed indication When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops printing and displays the paper misfeed mes- sage on the operation panel. To remove paper misfed in the machine, pull out the cassette, open the paper conveying unit or paper conveying cover.
Page 352: Paper Misfeed Detection Condition
2LB/2K9-5 (2) Paper misfeed detection condition Machine Figure 1-4-2 Paper jam location 1-4-2...
Page 353 2LB/2K9-4 * : This model does not support the following codes: 0111 /0503 /0504 /0505 /0513 /0514 /0515 /1703 /1704 /1713 /1714 /1904 /1914 /6001 /6021 /6041 / 6101 /6111 /6311 /6401 /6411 /6511 /6811 /6911 /7001 /7951 /9004 /9006 /9007 /9200 /9210 /9500 Code Contents Conditions...
Page 354 2LB/2K9-5 Code Contents Conditions location* 0215 Side multi tray release The side multi tray is released during printing. 0300 Ejection uncompleted An ejection-completed error has occurred. 0501 No paper feed from cassette Feed sensor 1 (FS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1.
Page 355 2LB/2K9 Code Contents Conditions location* 0535 Multiple sheets in cassette 5 SM feed sensor (SMFS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray). 0536 Multiple sheets in cassette 6 PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side large capacity feeder).
Page 356 2LB/2K9 Code Contents Conditions location* 1311 Middle sensor stay jam Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 1312 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 1313 Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3.
Page 357 2LB/2K9 Code Contents Conditions location* 2116 PF paper conveying sensor PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not 1 stay jam turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). 2117 PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder).
Page 358 2LB/2K9 Code Contents Conditions location* 2714 PF paper conveying sensor PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not 2 stay jam turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity feeder). 2717 PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large capacity feeder).
Page 359 2LB/2K9 Code Contents Conditions location* 3505 SM paper conveying sensor SM paper conveying sensor 2 (SMPCS2) does not 2 non arrival jam turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray). 3506 SM paper conveying sensor 2 (SMPCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side multi tray).
Page 360 2LB/2K9 Code Contents Conditions location* 3715 SM eject sensor stay jam SM eject sensor (SMES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray). 3716 SM eject sensor (SMES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side multi tray). 3717 SM eject sensor (SMES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side multi tray).
Page 361 2LB/2K9 Code Contents Conditions location* 4011 Registration sensor stay jam Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 4012 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 4013 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3.
Page 362 2LB/2K9 Code Contents Conditions location* 4111 Loop sensor stay jam Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 4112 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 4113 Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3.
Page 363 2LB/2K9 Code Contents Conditions location* 4211 Fuser eject sensor stay jam Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 4212 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 4213 Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3.
Page 364 2LB/2K9 Code Contents Conditions location* 4311 Duplex sensor 1 stay jam Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 4312 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 4313 Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3.
Page 365 2LB/2K9 Code Contents Conditions location* 4411 Duplex sensor 2 stay jam Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 4412 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 4413 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3.
Page 366 2LB/2K9 Code Contents Conditions location* 4611 Eject sensor stay jam Eject sensor (ES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 4612 Eject sensor (ES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 4613 Eject sensor (ES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3.
Page 367 2LB/2K9 Code Contents Conditions location* 4711 Switchback sensor stay jam Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 4712 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 4713 Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3.
Page 368 2LB/2K9 Code Contents Conditions location* 4911 BR conveying sensor 1 stay BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 4912 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 4913 BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3.
Page 369 2LB/2K9 Code Contents Conditions location* 5011 BR conveying sensor 2 stay BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 5012 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 5013 BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3.
Page 370 2LB/2K9 Code Contents Conditions location* 5111 BR eject sensor stay jam BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 5112 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 5113 BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3.
Page 371 2LB/2K9 Code Contents Conditions location* 6310 DF middle eject sensor stay DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. 6400 DF tray upper surface sen- DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS) does not sor non arrival jam turn on within specified time of DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) turning on.
Page 372 2LB/2K9 Code Contents Conditions location* 7310 CF eject sensor stay jam During three fold operation, CF eject sensor (CFES) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. 7400 CF side registration sensor 2 CF side registration sensor 2 (CFSRS2) is not non arrival jam turned on within specified time after driving the CF side registration motor 2 (CFSRM2).
Page 373 2LB/2K9-4 Code Contents Conditions location* 9020 Original skew feed jam DP skew sensor (DPSS) does not turn on within specified time of DP registration sensor (DPRS) turning on. 9030 Original multi feed jam DP multi feed sensor (DPMFS) does turn on. 9110 DP feed sensor stay jam DP feed sensor (DPFS) does not turn off within...
Page 374: Troubleshooting
2LB/2K9-5 1-4-2 Troubleshooting (1) First check items If the paper is fed askew, jammed, curled, or leading-edge dog-eared, first perform to check the following items. Check items Check description Corrective measures Paper 1. Check the paper delivered is If a dog-ear has happened, check there are no objects dog-eared, skewed, rumpled, existing in the conveying paths and, if any, fix.
Page 375 2LB/2K9-5 Check items Check description Corrective measures 8. Check the paper ejected is If the maintenance mode U161 shows that the fuser dog-eared, skewed, rumpled, temperature is set to an abnormal value, reset it to the loosely fused, or curled. default.
Page 376 2LB/2K9-5 Check items Check description Corrective measures Conveying 1. Check that the foreign If foreign objects such as scrips, etc., remain in the guide, objects including scrips, paper conveying path, remove. approaching paper clips, etc., do not exist guide, paddle in the paper conveying paths.
Page 377 2LB/2K9-5 Check items Check description Corrective measures Conveying 1. Check the conveying rollers Clean the conveying rollers or the pollyes. roller, feed have no paper dusts, toner, If variation in the external diameter or abrasion is roller or foreign objects observed, replace.
Page 378 2LB/2K9-5 Check items Check description Corrective measures Static Check if the location is Re-assemble and re-wire the static discharge sheet at susceptible to build static the ejection unit or the metal guide at the tranfer unit so discharge at the conveying guide that they are properly grounded.
Page 379 2LB/2K9-5 Jam types Check description Corrective measures 7. Check the separation If it gets in contact, replace the primary feed unit. roller is not disturbed as a driving component is in contact with the frame during the separation roller is in motion.
Page 380 2LB/2K9-5 Jam types Check description Corrective measures Multiple-feed Jam 1. Check if the cutting If the cutting edge of the paper bundle is crumpled or J0511, J0512, J0513, edge of the paper the cassette is loaded with multiple times of J0514, J0516, J0517, bundle is crumpled or replenishing paper, load new paper.
Page 381 2LB/2K9-5 Jam types Check description Corrective measures Intermediate/ 1. Check to see if the If it won't operate without hinderance, re-assemble or conveying sensor driving mechanism for replace the actuator's return spring. retention jam paper conveyance is (J1313, J1314, J1513, operative without a J1514) hinderance.
Page 382 2LB/2K9-5 Jam types Check description Corrective measures Loop sensor non 1. Check no wrinkles are Exercise a countermeasure against wrinkles. (Check arrival jam (J4101, observed at the sluck of for the existence of the regist guide.) J4102, J4103, J4104, paper during paper J4105, J4106, J4107) feeding.
Page 383 2LB/2K9-5 Jam types Check description Corrective measures BR conveying sensor 1. Check the location the Re-mount. 1/2 unreachable/stay bridge relay conveying jam (J49XX) unit is mounted. Eject sensor non arrival jam (J50XX) Eject sensor stay jam (J51XX) DF paper entry error JAM (J600X) Location of mounting the relaying conveyance unit...
Page 384 2LB/2K9-5 Jam types Check description Corrective measures BR conveying sensor 5. Check contamination of Clean or replace the rollers. 1/2 unreachable/stay the rollers of the bridge jam (J49XX) eject unit. Eject sensor non To the DF or Ejector arrival jam (J50XX) Crossed bridge unit Eject sensor stay jam (J51XX)
Page 385 2LB/2K9-5 Jam types Check description Corrective measures BR conveying sensor 9. Check if the pivot of the Re-mount. 1/2 unreachable/stay paper conveying guide jam (J49XX) of the bridge eject unit Note that when the top cover of the eject unit becomes open, the axle falls off because the internal paper conveyance Eject sensor non has fallen off.
Page 386 2LB/2K9-5 Jam types Check description Corrective measures DF conveying sensor 1. Check the main unit Perform the height adjustment by referring to the unreachable jam and the DF are installation instructions. (J610X) vertically flush with DF conveying sensor each other. retention jam (J611X) 2.
Page 387 2LB/2K9-5 Jam types Check description Corrective measures DF conveying sensor 3. Check if the jammed 1.If thepaper is caught at the hole of the bridge unreachable jam paper has a dog-ear. conveying unit and dog-eared and jammed, affix a (J610X) sheet of film over the hole.
Page 388 2LB/2K9-5 Jam types Check description Corrective measures DF conveying sensor 6. If the paper is stuck in Affix sheets of PET film at the Stay Punch in two unreachable jam front of the conveying parts. (J610X) roller and it is not DF conveying sensor damaged, check if it is S TAY P U N C H...
Page 389 2LB/2K9-5 Jam types Check description Corrective measures DF intermediate sen- 2. Check the range of the If the gap is not correct, fix balance of the bundle sor retention jam up and down eject unit. (J631X) movement of the If (1): Correct the phase shifting with meshing of the DF main tray ejection ejection rollers.
Page 390 2LB/2K9-5 Jam types Check description Corrective measures DF intermediate sen- 4. Check if the dog-eared Replace the cursor with a new type. sor retention jam paper, under-curled (J631X) paper, or the paper fed DF main tray ejection in a wrong timing is retention JAM (J641X) disturbed at the cursor DF eject sensor non...
Page 391 2LB/2K9-5 Jam types Check description Corrective measures DF intermediate sen- 8. Check if a floated Configure each of the cassettes for the weight of the sor retention jam staple, buckling, or paper loaded.Replace the paper. (J631X) stapling at a wrong Adjust the stapling home position by U246 - Staple DF main tray ejection position is occurred.
Page 392 2LB/2K9-5 (3) Paper jam at feeding from cassette 1 Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling at the primary feeding (to regist roller) Timing of detection Jam code J0501,J0511,J1301,J1311,J4001,J4011 Measures Related parts Paper feed motor(PFM) Registration sensor (RS) Paper feed clutch 1(PFCL1) Engine PWB (EPWB) Assist clutch 1 (ACSL1)
Page 393 2LB/2K9-5 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J13X1 (terminal), point of checking connection J13X Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-24 Middle sensor (MS): Conduct connectivity check, mounting location Feed PWB 2 YC8-9 check, operation check (U031) Assist clutch 1 (ACSL1): Operation...
Page 394 2LB/2K9-5 (4) Paper jam at feeding from cassette 2 Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling at the primary feeding (to regist roller) Timing of detection Jam code J0502,J0512,J1302,J1312,J1502,J1512,J4002,J4012 Corrective Action Related parts Paper feed motor (PFM) Engine PWB (EPWB) Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) Feed PWB 2 (FPWB2)
Page 395 2LB/2K9-5 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J13X2 (terminal), point of checking connection J13X2 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-24 Middle sensor (MS): Conduct connectivity check, mounting location, Feed PWB 2 YC8-9 check operation check (U031) Vertical conveying clutch (PCCL):...
Page 396 2LB/2K9-5 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J40X2 (terminal), point of checking connection J40X2 Feed PWB 1: Replace Engine PWB: Replace (5) Paper jam during manual feeding Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling at the primary feeding (to regist roller) Timing of detection Jam code...
Page 397 2LB/2K9-5 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J05X9 (terminal), point of checking connection J05X9 Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-24 MP feed sensor (MPFS): Conduct connectivity check, mounting location Feed PWB 1 YC17-9 check, operation check (U031) Manual feed conveying clutch (CL):...
Page 398 2LB/2K9-5 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J0131 (terminal), point of checking connection J0131 MP lift sensors 1 and 2: Check for Relay PWB (YC3-5, YC3-8) (YC12) connection and the position of the sensor to be mounted.
Page 399 2LB/2K9-5 (6) Paper jam at the duplex re-feeding part Electrical parts that could cause paper jam during paper travelling at the primary feeding (to regist roller) Timing of detection Jam code J0508,J0518 Corrective Action Related parts Duplex motor 2 (DUM2) Engine PWB (EPWB) Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1)
Page 400 2LB/2K9-5 (7) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the Secondary transfer part Timing of detection Jam code J410x,J411x Corrective Action Related parts Secondary transfer roller - transfers the Engine PWB (EPWB) drive from the transfer belt Registration motor (RM) Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1) Relay PWB (RYPWB) Loop sensor (LPS)
Page 401 2LB/2K9-5 (8) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the fuser and eject part Timing of detection Jam code J420x,J421x,J460x,J461x,J470x,J471x Corrective Action Related parts Fuser motor (FUM) Engine PWB (EPWB) Eject motor (EM) Front PWB (FRPWB) Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) Fuser eject sensor (FUES) Eject full sensor (EFS) Switchback sensor (SBS)
Page 402 2LB/2K9-5 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J46XX (terminal), point of checking connection J46XX Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-24 Eject full sensor (EFS): Conduct connectivity check, mounting location Front PWB YC5-16 check, operation check (U031) feedshift solenoid (FSSOL): feedshift...
Page 403 2LB/2K9-5 (9) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the duplex part Timing of detection Jam code J430x,J431x,J440x,J441x Corrective Action Related parts Duplex motor 1 (DUM1) Engine PWB (EPWB) Relay PWB (RYPWB) Duplex motor 2 (DUM2) * : In paper conveying unit Relay PWB (RYPWB) Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2)
Page 404 2LB/2K9-5 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J44XX (terminal), point of checking connection J44XX Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-24 Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2): Conduct connectivity check, mounting location Feed PWB 1 YC14-5 check, operation check (U031) Duplex motor 2 (DUM2): Operation...
Page 405 2LB/2K9-5 (10) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the BR (bridge) part Timing of detection Jam code J490x,J491x,J500x,J501x,J510x,J511x Corrective Action Related parts BR conveying motor 1 (BRCM1) BR feedshift solenoid (BRSOL) BR conveying motor 2 (BRCM2) Engine PWB (EPWB) BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) BR PWB (BRPWB) BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2)
Page 406 2LB/2K9-5 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J51XX (terminal), point of checking connection J51XX Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-24 BR eject sensor (BRES): Conduct connectivity check, mounting location Engine PWB YC20-17 check, operation check (U031) BR feedshift solenoid (BRSOL): Check...
Page 407 2LB/2K9-5 (11) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the DF paper entry, feedshift and subtray left eject part Timing of detection Jam code J610x,J611x,J620x,J621x,J630x,J631x Corrective Action Related parts DF paper entry motor (DFPEM) DF feedshift solenoid 3 (DFFSSOL) DF middle motor (DFMM) DP main PWB (DFMPWB) DF eject motor (DFEM)
Page 408 2LB/2K9-5 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J62XX (terminal), point of checking connection J62XX Items for Initial Checks see page 1-4-24 DF sub eject sensor (DFSES): Conduct connectivity check, mounting location DF main PWB YC21-3 check, operation check (U241) DF feedshift solenoid 3 (DFFSSOL):...
Page 409 2LB/2K9-5 (12) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the DF process part Timing of detection Jam code J6500,J651x,J6600,J6610 Corrective Action Related parts DF middle motor (DFMM) DF main PWB(DFMPWB) DF drum motor (DFDRM) DF bundle eject sensor (DFBDS) DF drum sensor (DFDRS) DF feedshift solenoid 1 (DFDRSOL) Checking...
Page 410 2LB/2K9-5 Checking procedure at the Corrective action at the occurrence of On/Off control signal output connector occurrence of J66XX (terminal), point of checking connection J66XX DF drum motor (DFDRM): Operation DF main PWB YC18-1 to 4 check (U240) DF main PWB(DFMPWB): Replace (13) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the DF eject tray part Timing of detection Jam code...
Page 411 2LB/2K9-5 (14) Electrical parts that could cause paper jam at the CF conveying part Timing of detection Jam code J6710,J7700,J7710 Corrective Action Related parts DF drum motor (DFDRM) DF main PWB(DFMPWB) CF paper entry motor (CFPEM) CF PWB (CFPWB) DF drum sensor (DFDRS) CF conveying sensor (CFPCS) Checking procedure at the...
Page 412: Self-Diagnostic Function
2LB/2K9-5 1-4-3 Self-diagnostic function (1) Self-diagnostic function This machine is equipped with self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, the machine stops print- ing and display an error message on the operation panel. An error message consists of a message prompting a contact to service personnel and a four-digit error code indicating the type of the error.
Page 413: Self Diagnostic Codes
2LB/2K9-5 (2) Self diagnostic codes If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement Caution: Before attempting to check the power supply, fuser unit, and the IH controller PWB, be sure to turn the power switch off and unplug the machine from power.
Page 414 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after 0150 Backup memory read/write EEPROM (Engine error (engine PWB) PWB) 5 seconds, then turn power on. 1. No response is issued 2. Check that the EEPROM is peroperly from the device in reading/ installed on the engine PWB and re- writing for 5 ms or more...
Page 415 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after 0350 Panel PWB communication Operation PWB error (electronic volume I2C 5 seconds, then turn power on. communication error) 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is NACK is received during I2C firmly connected and, if necessary, con- communication ->...
Page 416 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. If an abnormal noise is heard from the 0640 Hard disk error The hard disk cannot be HDD, replace the HDD. accessed. 2. Check the SATA wiring between the HDD and the main circuit PWB for loose connection, disconnection and damages, and that it is connected into the correct terminal.
Page 417 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. If an abnormal noise is heard from the 0670 Hard disk overwriting era- sure error HDD, replace the HDD. 2. Check the SATA wiring between the HDD and the main circuit PWB for loose connection, disconnection and damages, and that it is connected into the correct terminal.
Page 418 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Make sure that the back-up batteries on 0840 Faults of RTC Battery (main (“Time for maintenance T” is PWB) the main PWB are not short-circuited. displayed) 2. Perform U209, adjust RTC setting. [Check at power up] 3.
Page 419 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Manual feed lift 1. Check that the paper lift base of the 1000 MP lift motor error If the MP lift sensor 1 (upper base elevating manual feed tray can smoothly ascend limit detect) or 2 (bottom mechanism and descent, if not, repair or replace.
Page 420 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Cassette lift base 1010 Lift motor 1 error Check that the cassette base can be After cassette 1 is inserted, lift elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or sensor 1 does not turn on mechanism replace.
Page 421 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Cassette lift base 1020 Lift motor 2 error Check that the cassette base can be After cassette 2 is inserted, lift elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or sensor 2 does not turn on mechanism replace.
Page 422 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Cassette lift base 1050 SM lift motor error Check that the cassette base can be (side multi tray) elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or After cassette 5 is inserted, mechanism replace.
Page 423 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Cassette lift base 1060 PF lift motor 1 error Check that the cassette base can be (side paper feeder) elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or After cassette 6 is inserted, mechanism replace.
Page 424 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Cassette lift base 1070 PF lift motor 2 error Check that the cassette base can be (side paper feeder) elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or After cassette 7 is inserted, mechanism replace.
Page 425 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Paper feeder lift 1100 PF lift motor 1 error Check that the cassette base can be (large capacity feeder) base elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or After cassette 3 is inserted, mechanism replace.
Page 426 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Paper feeder lift 1110 PF lift motor 2 error Check that the cassette base can be (large capacity feeder) base elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or After cassette 4 is inserted, mechanism replace.
Page 427 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Paper feeder lift 1140 SD lift motor error Check that the cassette base can be (side deck) base elevating manipulated smoothly, if not, repair or After cassette 5 is inserted, mechanism replace.
Page 428 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures SM multi feed 1. Check that the sensor is correctly 1350 SM multi feed sensor error (side multi tray) sensor positioned. The SM multi feed sensor has 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is detected multi feeding 5 times firmly connected and, if necessary, successively.
Page 429 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Paper feeder 1800 Paper feeder communica- Check the wiring connection status with the tion error main unit and, if necessary, try connecting it A communication error from again. paper feeder is detected 10 PF main PWB 1.
Page 430: Times In Succession
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Side paper feeder 1820 Side paper feeder communi- Check the wiring connection status with the cation error main unit and, if necessary, try connecting it A communication error from again. paper feeder is detected 10 SM main PWB 1.
Page 431: Confirm That The Wiring Connector Is Firmly Connected And, If Necessary, Connect The Connector All The Way In
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 1950 Intermediate transfer belt Transfer belt sen- unit EEPROM error firmly connected and, if necessary, No response is issued from connect the connector all the way in. the device in reading/writing Engine PWB (YC27) and RFID PWB for 5 ms or more and this...
Page 432: If The Wiring Is Disconnected, Shorted Or
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Check that the developer waste lock has 2102 Developer motor C error Developer unit C After developer motor C is been released and, if not, release the driven, the ready signal does lock (see page 1-2-24).
Page 433 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Check that the developer waste lock has 2103 Developer motor M error Developer unit M After developer motor M is been released and, if not, release the driven, the ready signal does lock (see page 1-2-24).
Page 434 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Check that the developer waste lock has 2104 Developer motor Y error Developer unit Y After developer motor Y is been released and, if not, release the driven, the ready signal does lock (see page 1-2-24).
Page 435 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U030 Belt Meand (transfer 2201 Drum motor K steady-state Drum unit error Motor) and check that the drum motor The motor revolution fluctu- can rotate (see page 1-3-32). ates more than +/-6.2% of the 2.
Page 436 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U030 Belt Meand (transfer 2202 Drum motor C steady-state Drum unit error Motor) and check that the drum motor The motor revolution fluctu- can rotate (see page 1-3-32). ates more than +/-6.2% of the 2.
Page 437 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U030 Belt Meand (transfer 2203 Drum motor M steady-state Drum unit error Motor) and check that the drum motor The motor revolution fluctu- can rotate (see page 1-3-32). ates more than +/-6.2% of the 2.
Page 438 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2204 Drum motor Y steady-state Drum unit error U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor). The motor revolution fluctu- (see page 1-3-32). ates more than +/-6.2% of the 2.
Page 439 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2211 Drum motor K startup error Drum unit Drum motor K is not stabilized U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor). within 5 s since the motor is (see page 1-3-32).
Page 440 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2212 Drum motor C startup error Drum unit Drum motor C is not stabilized U030 Belt Mea nd (transfer motor). within 5 s since the motor is (see page 1-3-32).
Page 441 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2213 Drum motor M startup error Drum unit Drum motor M is not stabilized U030 Belt Mea nd (transfer motor). within 5 s since the motor is (see page 1-3-32).
Page 442 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2214 Drum motor Y startup error Drum unit Drum motor Y is not stabilized Belt Mean (transfer motor) by U030 within 5 s since the motor is motor operation check activated.
Page 443 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2231 Drum motor K sub sensor Drum unit error U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor). No signal is input to the sen- (see page 1-3-32). sor for 100 ms continuously.
Page 444: Confirm That The Wiring Connector Is Firmly Connected And, If Necessary, Connect The Connector All The Way In
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2232 Drum motor C main sensor Drum unit error U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor). No signal is input to the sen- (see page 1-3-32). sor for 100 ms continuously.
Page 445 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2233 Drum motor M main sensor Drum unit error U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor). No signal is input to the sen- (see page 1-3-32). sor for 100 ms continuously.
Page 446 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2234 Drum motor Y main sensor Drum unit error Belt Mean (transfer motor) by U030 No signal is input to the sen- motor operation check sor for 100 ms continuously.
Page 447 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2241 Drum motor K sub sensor Drum unit error U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor). No signal is input to the sen- (see page 1-3-32). sor for 100 ms continuously.
Page 448 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2242 Drum motor C sub sensor Drum unit error U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor). No signal is input to the sen- (see page 1-3-32). sor for 100 ms continuously.
Page 449 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2243 Drum motor M sub sensor Drum unit error U030 Belt Meand (transfer motor). No signal is input to the sen- (see page 1-3-32). sor for 100 ms continuously.
Page 450 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2244 Drum motor Y sub sensor Drum unit error Belt Mean (transfer motor) by U030 No signal is input to the sen- motor operation check sor for 100 ms continuously.
Page 451 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2300 Fuser motor error Fuser motor After fuser motor is driven, the U030 Fuser (fuser motor) ready signal does not turn to L (see page 1-3-32). within 2 s.
Page 452 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the feed unit operation, exe- 2600 PF paper feed motor error PF paper feed (large capacity feeder) motor cute U247 LCF- Motor ON (see page 1- After PF paper feed motor is 3-136).
Page 453 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the feed unit operation, exe- 2640 SD paper feed motor error SD paper feed (side deck) motor cute U247 Side deck- Motor ON (see After SD paper feed motor is page 1-3-136).
Page 454: Check The Paper Feed Roller And Drive Gear Can Rotate Or They Are Not Unusually Loaded And, If Necessary, Replace
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the feed unit operation, exe- 2660 PF paper feed motor error PF paper feed (side large capacity feeder) motor cute U247 Side LCF - Motor ON (see After PF paper feed motor is page 1-3-136).
Page 455 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2700 3-color release motor error Color release When the color release motor motor U30 CMY Release (see page 1-3-32). is driven, the color release Color release sen- 2.
Page 456: Confirm That The Wiring Connector Is Firmly Connected And, If Necessary, Connect The Connector All The Way In
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 2730 1. The main-unit access drawer of the Paper conveying unit paper conveying unit has no foreign objects adhered or no distorted pins and, if necessary, repair. 2. Check the paper conveying unit is firmly closed.
Page 457 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Transfer motor 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2760 Transfer motor startup error Transfer motor is not stabi- U030 Belt Meand (see page 1-3-32). lized within 5 s since the 2.
Page 458: Engine Pwb (Yc3)
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Transfer belt skew 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 2780 Intermediate transfer belt skew correction sensor sensor firmly connected and, if necessary, error (Intermediate connect the connector all the way in. An abnormal value is detected transfer belt unit) intermediate transfer belt unit and...
Page 459: If The Wiring Is Disconnected, Shorted Or
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Waste toner box 1. Rotate the waste toner spiral by the 2810 Inner waste toner motor error hand and check that they are not Initialized when an error is unusually loaded. constantly observed for 2 sec- 2.
Page 460: Check The Engine Software And Upgrade To The Latest, If Necessary
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Transfer cleaning 1. Rotate the roller and the drive gear by 2840 Intermediate transfer belt cleaning motor error motor the hand and check that they are not After transfer cleaning motor unusually loaded.
Page 461: Confirm That The Wiring Connector Is Firmly Connected And, If Necessary, Connect The Connector All The Way In
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Transfer belt 1. To check the motor operation, execute 2860 Transfer belt sub sensor error sensor U030 Belt Meand (see page 1-3-32). The signal is not received for 2. Check that the drive roller for the sensor 100 ms in succession.
Page 462: Confirm That The Wiring Connector Is Firmly Connected And, If Necessary, Connect The Connector All The Way In
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures The scanner mirror 3100 Scanner carriage error Check whether the scanner mirror frame has 1.The HP sensor won’t turn in frame is being been unlocked and unlock if necessary (see a constant mode after the rel- locked after setup.
Page 463: If The Wiring Is Disconnected, Shorted Or Grounded, Replace The Wiring
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation 3210 CIS lamp error When input value at the time Release (see page 1-3-206). of CIS illumination does not 2. Execute CCD of U061 lamp check (see exceed the threshold value page 1-3-51).
Page 464: If The Wiring Is Disconnected, Shorted Or Grounded, Replace The Wiring
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures LED lamp PWB 1. To check the lamp, execute U061 CCD 3300 Optical system (AGC) error One of the gains is FF or 0x89 (see page 1-3-51). during the CCD lamp AGC is 2.
Page 465: Driven, The Ready Signal Does
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Scanner sequence error ISC PWB 1. Execute U021 memory initializing (see 3600 An abnormal process has page 1-3-29). occurred inside the program. 2. Replace the ISC PWB and execute U411 (see page 1-3-161). Scanner device error CCD (ISU) 3700...
Page 466: Driven, The Ready Signal Does
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Polygon motor C 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 4002 Polygon motor C synchroni- zation error (LSU) firmly connected and, if necessary, After polygon motor C is connect the connector all the way in. driven, the ready signal does Polygon motor C and LSU relay PWB not turn to L within 30 s.
Page 467: Replace The Engine Pwb
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Polygon motor K 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 4011 Polygon motor K steady- state error (LSU) firmly connected and, if necessary, After polygon motor K is stabi- connect the connector all the way in. lized, the ready signal is at the Polygon motor K and LSU relay PWB H level for 15 s continuously.
Page 468 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Polygon motor Y 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 4014 Polygon motor Y steady- state error (LSU) firmly connected and, if necessary, After polygon motor Y is stabi- connect the connector all the way in. lized, the ready signal is at the Polygon motor Y and LSU relay PWB H level for 15 s continuously.
Page 469 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures PD PWB M (LSU) 1. Confirm that the FCC wiring connector is 4103 BD initialization error M After polygon motor M is not distorted and connect the FCC driven, the BD signal is not wiring all the way in.
Page 470 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures PD PWB C (LSU) 1. Confirm that the FCC wiring connector is 4202 BD steady-state error C The BD signal is not detected. not distorted and connect the FCC wiring all the way in. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC10) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and Engine PWB...
Page 471: Not Turn To L Within 2 S
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Laser scanner unit Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 1- 4300 Polygon motor phase error ASIC won’t settle in comple- 5-32). tion of phase adjustment for 2 Engine PWB 1. Check the engine software and upgrade s after a BD signal is to the latest, if necessary.
Page 472 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Drum unit 1. Execute U030 Belt Mean Drum Motor 5101 Main high-voltage error K Measure the inflowing current and check that the drum motor can when Vpp is varied in 3 steps rotate (see page 1-3-32).
Page 473 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Drum unit 1. Execute U030 Belt Mean Drum Motor 5102 Main high-voltage error C Measure the inflowing current and check that the drum motor can when Vpp is varied in 3 steps rotate (see page 1-3-32).
Page 474 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Drum unit 1. Execute U030 Belt Mean Drum Motor 5103 Main high-voltage error M Measure the inflowing current and check that the drum motor can when Vpp is varied in 3 steps rotate (see page 1-3-32).
Page 475 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Drum unit 1. Execute U030 Belt Mean Drum Motor 5104 Main high-voltage error Y Measure the inflowing current and check that the drum motor can when Vpp is varied in 3 steps rotate (see page 1-3-32).
Page 476 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Check that no paper jam is present. 6000 Broken fuser heater wire Fuser center thermistor 1 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is does not reach 100° C/ 212 °F firmly connected and, if necessary, even after 60 s during warm- connect the connector all the way in.
Page 477 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Check that no paper jam is present. 6030 Broken fuser center therm- istor 1 wire 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is Input from fuser center therm- firmly connected and, if necessary, istor 1 is 1010 or more (A/D connect the connector all the way in.
Page 478 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6040 Fuser heater error Input from fuser center therm- firmly connected and, if necessary, istor 1 is abnormal value con- connect the connector all the way in. tinuously for 1 s.
Page 479 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Power source 1. Check that the operating voltage falls 6050 Abnormally low fuser center thermistor 1 temperature within +/-10%. Fuser center thermistor 1 2. Check no voltage drop is caused. The detects a temperature lower heater is deactivated at 70V or lower.
Page 480 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6100 Broken fuser heater wire Fuser press thermistor 5 won’t firmly connected and, if necessary, reach the reference tempera- connect the connector all the way in. ture in 480 s after shifting to Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26) low power mode.
Page 481 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 6130 Broken fuser press thermis- 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is tor 5 wire firmly connected and, if necessary, con- The input from the fuser press nect the connector all the way in. thermistor 5 has been less Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26) than 30°C/ 86°F (A/D: greater...
Page 482 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6150 Abnormally low fuser press thermistor 5 temperature firmly connected and, if necessary, Fuser press thermistor 5 connect the connector all the way in. detects a temperature lower Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26) than 30°C/ 86°F for 1 s after...
Page 483 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 6200 Broken fuser edge heater 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is wire firmly connected and, if necessary, con- Fuser edge thermistor 2 does nect the connector all the way in. not reach 100°...
Page 484 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6220 Abnormally high fuser edge thermistor 2 temperature firmly connected and, if necessary, Fuser edge thermistor 2 connect the connector all the way in. detects a temperature higher Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26) than 240°C/ 464°F for 1 s.
Page 485 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6230 Broken fuser edge thermis- tor 2 wire firmly connected and, if necessary, The Input signal from the connect the connector all the way in. fuser edge thermistor 2 is 992 Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26) or more (A/D value) continu-...
Page 486 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6250 Abnormally low fuser edge thermistor 2 temperature firmly connected and, if necessary, Fuser edge thermistor 2 connect the connector all the way in. detects a temperature lower Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26) than 100°C/ 212°F for 1 s dur-...
Page 487 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6330 Broken fuser middle therm- istor 3 wire firmly connected and, if necessary, Fuser middle thermistor 3 connect the connector all the way in. detects a temperature lower Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26) than 20°C/ 68°F continuously...
Page 488 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures Fuser unit 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6530 Broken fuser thermistor 4 wire firmly connected and, if necessary, Fuser thermistor 4 detects a connect the connector all the way in. temperature lower than 20°C/ Fuser unit and Engine PWB (YC26) 68°F continuously for 1 s...
Page 489: To Check The Motor Operation, Execute
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 6600 Fuser belt rotation error Fuser motor A belt rotating pulse is not U030 Fuser (see page 1-3-32). received for 1 s. 2. Check that the drive gear can rotate and (Engine CPU) not heavily loaded and, if necessary, apply grease to the axle holder and...
Page 490 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 6610 Fuser release sensor error Fuser release The fusing pressure release U030 Fuser Release (see page 1-3-32). motor sensor won’t send an off sig- 2.
Page 491 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6710 Fuser IH PWB CPU reset Fuser IH PWB error firmly connected and, if necessary, Watch doc timer has been connect the connector all the way in. overflowed.
Page 492 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the motor operation, execute 6720 Fuser IH belt rotation error Fuser motor While driving, the pulse count U030 Fuser (see page 1-3-32). is less than 3 for 2 seconds 2.
Page 493 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6730 Abnormally high fuser IH Fuser IH PWB PWB temperature 1 (IGBT1) firmly connected and, if necessary, The input detect temperature connect the connector all the way in. is higher than 115°C/ 221 °F.
Page 494 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6750 Fuser IH output over-cur- Fuser IH PWB rent error firmly connected and, if necessary, The output current of IH CPU connect the connector all the way in. is higher than 110 A for 10 ms Fuser IH PWB( YC4) and Engine PWB in succession.
Page 495 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 6770 Fuser IH low electric power Fuser unit error firmly connected and, if necessary, Less than 0.6 times of the pre- connect the connector all the way in. set power is detected for 120 Fuser unit and Fuser IH PWB (YC6) ms in succession after the IH...
Page 496 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Turn the main power switch off and after 6910 Engine software ready error Engine PWB The device won’t engage in 5 seconds, turn it on. ready state in 60 minutes after 2.
Page 497 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the fan motor operation, exe- 6940 IH PWB cooling fan motor IH fan motor error cute U037 IH PWB (see page 1-3-39). When the IH fan motor is 2.
Page 498 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 6950 Fuser IH PWB communica- 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is Power source PWB tion error firmly connected and, if necessary, con- No response is received in 30 nect the connector all the way in. ms since a command is sent Power source PWB (YC9) and Feed to IHCPU.
Page 499 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 6990 Fuser power supply incom- Differences in When this has happened after initialization patibility settings after using U021, make settings identical with the Information won’t match initialization voltages on the IH PWB using U169 (see between the engine backup page 1-3-29,1-3-108).
Page 500: Check The Drive Gear Can Rotate Or They Are Not Unusually Loaded And, If Necessary, Replace
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Check that the spiral screw of the toner 7002 Toner motor C error Toner container C During the toner motor is container can be rotated by the hand. driven, an event in which a 2.
Page 501 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Check that the spiral screw of the toner 7003 Toner motor M error Toner container M During the toner motor is container can be rotated by the hand. driven, an event in which a 2.
Page 502 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Check that the spiral screw of the toner 7004 Toner motor Y error Toner container Y During the toner motor is container can be rotated by the hand. driven, an event in which a 1.
Page 503 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 7101 Toner sensor K error Failure of locking If an abnormal noise is heard, check that the Sensor output value of 60 or the developer developer ejection outlet is released and, if less or 944 or more continued waste slot at setup.
Page 504 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 7102 Toner sensor C error Failure of locking If an abnormal noise is heard, check that the Sensor output value of 60 or the developer developer ejection outlet is released and, if less or 944 or more continued waste slot at setup.
Page 505 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 7103 Toner sensor M error Failure of locking If an abnormal noise is heard, check that the Sensor output value of 60 or the developer developer ejection outlet is released and, if less or 944 or more continued waste slot at setup.
Page 506 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 7104 Toner sensor Y error Failure of locking If an abnormal noise is heard, check that the Sensor output value of 60 or the developer developer ejection outlet is released and, if less or 944 or more continued waste slot at setup.
Page 507 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm Ext/Int is displayed by U139 7200 Broken outer temperature Outer temperature sensor 2 wire temperature and humidity (see page 1- sensor 2 The sensor input sampling is 3-94). greater than 230. 2.
Page 508 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm LSU is displayed by U139 7221 Broken LSU thermistor K LSU thermistor K wire temperature and humidity (see page 1- The sensor input sampling is 3-94). greater than 230. 2.
Page 509 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm LSU is displayed by U139 7223 Broken LSU thermistor M LSU thermistor M wire temperature and humidity (see page 1- The sensor input sampling is 3-94). greater than 230. 2.
Page 510 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm LSU is displayed by U139 7231 Short-circuited LSU therm- LSU thermistor K istor K temperature and humidity (see page 1- The sensor input sampling is 3-94). less than 69. 2.
Page 511 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm LSU is displayed by U139 7233 Short-circuited LSU therm- LSU thermistor M istor M temperature and humidity (see page 1- The sensor input sampling is 3-94). less than 69. 2.
Page 512 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm Developing is displayed by 7241 Broken developer thermis- Developer tor K wire U139 temperature and humidity (see thermistor K The sensor input sampling is page 1-3-70). greater than 230. 2.
Page 513 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm Developing is displayed by 7243 Broken developer thermis- Developer tor M wire U139 temperature and humidity (see thermistor M The sensor input sampling is page 1-3-94). greater than 230. 2.
Page 514 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm Developing is displayed by 7251 Short-circuited developer Developer thermistor K U139 temperature and humidity (see thermistor K The sensor input sampling is page 1-3-94). less than 69. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and, if necessary, connect the connector all the way in.
Page 515 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm Developing is displayed by 7253 Short-circuited developer Developer thermistor M U139 temperature and humidity (see thermistor M The sensor input sampling is page 1-3-94). less than 69. 2. Confirm that the wiring connector is firmly connected and, if necessary, con- nect the connector all the way in.
Page 516 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 7301 Toner hopper motor K error 1. Check the drive gear can rotate or they Toner hopper During the Toner hopper are not unusually loaded and, if neces- motor K motor K is driven, an event in sary, replace.
Page 517 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 7302 Toner hopper motor C error 1. Check the drive gear can rotate or they Toner hopper During the Toner hopper are not unusually loaded and, if neces- motor C motor C is driven, an event in sary, replace.
Page 518 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 7303 Toner hopper motor M error 1. Check the drive gear can rotate or they Toner hopper During the Toner hopper are not unusually loaded and, if neces- motor M motor M is driven, an event in sary, replace.
Page 519 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 7304 Toner hopper motor Y error 1. Check the drive gear can rotate or they Toner hopper During the Toner hopper are not unusually loaded and, if neces- motor Y motor Y is driven, an event in sary, replace.
Page 520 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. To check the fan motor operation, exe- 7470 Toner fan motor 1 error Toner fan motor 1 The toner fan motor 1 signal cute U037 Toner (see page 1-3-39). has been detected as uncon- 2.
Page 521 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U464 Calib for setting ID 7601 ID sensor 1 error ID sensor1 (front) An abnormal value is detected compensation operation and check the in the input data to ID sensor displayed values by U465 Boas Calib for ID compensation reference.
Page 522 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 7800 Broken outer temperature Outer temperature sensor 1 wire firmly connected and, if necessary, sensor 1 connect the connector all the way in. The device did not respond for Outer temperature sensor 1 and Front more than 5 ms during PWB (YC16)
Page 523 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 7902 Drum C EEPROM error DR PWB- C No response is issued from firmly connected and, if necessary, the device in reading/writing connect the connector all the way in. for 5 ms or more and this DR PWB- C and Front PWB (YC12) problem is repeated five times...
Page 524 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 7911 Developer unit K EEPROM Developer unit K error firmly connected and, if necessary, No response is issued from connect the connector all the way in. the device in reading/writing Developer unit K and Front PWB (YC9) for 5 ms or more and this...
Page 525 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 7913 Developer unit M EEPROM Developer unit M error firmly connected and, if necessary, No response is issued from connect the connector all the way in. the device in reading/writing Developer unit M and Front PWB (YC11) for 5 ms or more and this...
Page 526 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the FCC wiring connector is 7941 Laser scanner unit K APC PWB K EEPROM error not distorted and connect the FCC Mismatch of reading data from wiring all the way in. two locations occurs 8 times APC PWB K and LSU relay PWB (YC5) successively.
Page 527 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the FCC wiring connector is 7943 Laser scanner unit M APC PWB M EEPROM error not distorted and connect the FCC Mismatch of reading data from wiring all the way in. two locations occurs 8 times APC PWB M and LSU relay PWB (YC8) successively.
Page 528 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Punch to check 8010 Punch motor error 1 Punch motor When the punch motor is the finisher operation (see page 1-3- driven, punch home position 122). sensor does not turn on within 2.
Page 529 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Punch to check 8020 Punch motor error 2 Punch motor Home position is not obtained the finisher operation (see page 1-3- in 3 s after home position is 122).
Page 530 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Punch to check 8030 Punch motor error 3 Punch motor Home position does not turn the finisher operation (see page 1-3- from On to Off in 50 ms after 122).
Page 531: Check That The Sensor And Its Mounting Board Are Correctly Positioned
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Beat to check the 8090 DF paddle motor error DF paddle motor When the DF paddle motor is finisher operation (see page 1-3-122). driven, DF paddle sensor 2.
Page 532 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute Motor - Eject Unlock (Full) of 8100 DF eject release motor error DF eject release When the DF eject release U240 finisher operation check (see page motor motor is driven, DF bundle DF bundle 1-3-122).
Page 533 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Sort Test to check 8110 DF shift motor 1 error DF shift motor 1 DF shift sensor 1 won’t turn on the finisher operation (see page 1-3- [front] when it has travelled 160 mm 122).
Page 534 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Sort Test to check 8120 DF shift motor 2 error DF shift motor 2 DF shift sensor 1 won’t turn on the finisher operation (see page 1-3- [rear] when it has travelled 160 mm 122).
Page 535 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Check that cancelling the maintenance 8130 DF shift release motor error DF shift release When the DF shift release mode after executing U240 Motor - Sort motor motor is driven, DF shift for the finisher operation check lets the release sensor does not turn rear and forth cursors return to the home...
Page 536 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Tray to check the 8140 DF tray motor error 1 DF tray motor When the main tray has finisher operation (see page 1-3-122). ascended, DF tray sensor 1 or 2.
Page 537 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Tray to check the 8150 DF tray motor error 2 DF tray motor When the main tray has finisher operation (see page 1-3-122). descended, DF tray sensor 1 2.
Page 538 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Tray to check the 8160 DF tray motor error 3 DF tray motor When the main tray has finisher operation (see page 1-3-122). descended, DF tray sensor 4 2.
Page 539 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Width Test to 8170 DF side registration motor 1 DF side registration error 1 check the finisher operation (see page motor 1 When initial operation, DF 1-3-122).
Page 540 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Width Test to 8180 DF side registration motor 1 DF side registration error 2 check the finisher operation (see page motor 1 JAM6810 (jam in front of width 1-3-122).
Page 541 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Width Test to 8190 DF side registration motor 2 DF side registration error 1 check the finisher operation (see page motor 2 When initial operation, DF 1-3-122).
Page 542 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Width Test to 8200 DF side registration motor 2 DF side registration error 2 check the finisher operation (see page motor 2 JAM6910 (jam in rear of width 1-3-122).
Page 543 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Staple Move to 8210 DF slide motor error DF slide motor When initial operation, DF sta- check the finisher operation (see page ple sensor does not turn on 1-3-122).
Page 544 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Remove the staple unit and check that 8230 DF staple motor error 1 DF staple motor stapling is possible without a jam. Staple JAM (DF) has been 2. Confirm that the FCC wiring connector is detected twice in a row.
Page 545 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 8260 DF middle motor home 1. Execute U240 Motor - Middle(H)(L) (see DF middle motor position error page 1-3-122). DF paddle sensor is not 2. Check that the drive from the motor turned on within 1s after reaches the paddle.
Page 546 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute Motor - Width Test of U240 8310 CF side registration motor 2 CF side registration error finisher operation check (see page 1-3- motor 2 When initial operation, CF 122). side registration sensor 2 2.
Page 547 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Motor - Bundle Up / Down 8320 CF adjustment motor error CF adjustment When initial operation, CF to check the finisher operation (see page motor1,2 adjustment sensor does not 1-3-122).
Page 548 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Blade to check 8330 CF blade motor error CF blade motor When initial operation, CF the finisher operation (see page 1-3- blade sensor does not turn on 122).
Page 549 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Width Test to 8350 CF side registration motor 1 CF side registration error check the finisher operation (see page motor 1 When initial operation, CF 1-3-122). side registration sensor 1 2.
Page 550 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Folding to check 8360 CF main motor error CF main motor During driving the motor, the the finisher operation (see page 1-3- lock signal is detected for 1 s 122).
Page 551 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Punch Move to 8410 Punch slide motor error 1 Punch slide motor The punch slide sensor won’t check the finisher operation (see page turn On when home position 1-3-122).
Page 552 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U240 Booklet - Punch Move to 8420 Punch slide motor error 2 Punch slide motor In detection of paper edges, check the finisher operation (see page the paper edge cannot be 1-3-122).
Page 553 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 8430 Punch unit communication Punch PWB error firmly connected and, if necessary, Communication with the connect the connector all the way in. punch unit is not possible. Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC7) 2.
Page 554 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute Mail Box - Conv of U240 8520 MB conveying motor error 2 MB conveying When standby operation, MB finisher operation check (see page 1-3- motor home position sensor does 122).
Page 555 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 8900 Document finisher backup DF main PWB error firmly connected and, if necessary, Read and write data does not connect the connector all the way in. match 3 times in succession.
Page 556 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation 9040 DP lift motor going up error DP lift motor When the DP lift motor is Release (see page 1-3-206). driven, DP lift sensor 1 does 2.
Page 557 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute U906 Separating Operation 9050 DP lift motor going down DP lift motor error Release (see page 1-3-206). When the DP lift motor is 2. Execute U243 Lift Motor to check the DP driven, DP lift sensor 2 does motor operation (see page 1-3-127).
Page 558: If The Wiring Is Disconnected, Shorted Or Grounded, Replace The Wiring
2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Execute CIS automatic original 9080 LED fault detection DP CIS A block is existent below a document alignment by U411 (see page peak which was obtained by 1-3-161). activating the LEDs in the four 2.
Page 559 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 9140 Sensor error in coin vender Coin jam in the Check visually and remedy. change (Yen 100) change tube Change is empty despite Contact in the Check the connection of the empty change change is enough.
Page 560 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Confirm that the wiring connector is 9500 ISC PWB error A Main PWB firmly connected and, if necessary, ISC PWB connect the connector all the way in. Main PWB (YC25) and ISC PWB (YC4) 2.
Page 561 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after F000 Communication error Main PWB between main PWB and 5 seconds, then turn power on. operation PWB 2. Check that the wirings and connetors between the main circuit PWB and the operation circuit PWB and between the main circuit PWB and the HDD are...
Page 562 2LB/2K9-5 Check procedures/ Code Contents Related parts corrective measures 1. Turn the main power swtch off and after F041 Communication error Main PWB between Main PWB and 5 seconds, then turn power on. Scanner engine 2. Check that the wires between the main PWB and the ISC PWB are normal.
Page 563: Image Formation Problems
2LB/2K9-5 1-4-4 Image formation problems Isolate the component an image defect has occurred from. <A guide to isolate the component of the cause.> Run U089 to print a test page and check whether an image defect happens. YES: Main unit as the cause of defect NO: Scanner as the cause of defect Perform enlarged or reduced copying and verify if the defective images are enlarged or reduced, accordingly.
Page 564 2LB/2K9-5 Printing data from PC : Printer Main PWB Main PWB Engine LSU relay Driver (DDR mem- → HDD → (DDR mem- → LSU → → → FAX (send) : LED lump Main Main → → → HDD → → FAX PWB →...
Page 565 2LB/2K9-5 1-4-5 Poor image (due to DP and scanner reading) (1) No image (2) No image (3) Image is too (4) The back- (5) White streaks appears appears light. ground is col- are printed ver- (entirely white). (entirely black). ored. tically.
Page 566: No Image Appears (Entirely White)
2LB/2K9-5 (1) No image appears (entirely white). Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Contact glass assy Check the location the contact Re-mount the contact glass if it is hanged off. glass is mounted. FFC cable CCD Reinsert the connector if it its connection is Check the FFC cable between loose.
Page 567 2LB/2K9-5 2. DP-scanning first (front) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Verify the sides of the original If the sides of the original document are document. reversed, place the original document properly. Contact glass assy Check the location the contact Re-mount the contact glass if it is hanged off.
Page 568: No Image Appears (Entirely Black)
2LB/2K9-5 (2) No image appears (entirely black). Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if it its connection is the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose.
Page 569 2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-59) 3. DP-scanning second (back) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action DP_CIS unit Check the location the CIS unit Re-mount the CIS unit if it is hanged off. is mounted.
Page 570: Image Is Too Light
2LB/2K9-5 (3) Image is too light. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action The settings of the Check the settings of the adjust- 1. Deactivate EcoPrint if it is activated. Or, if adjustment of den- ment of density. the density is too low, chosse an image sity quality that suits the original docuemt in...
Page 571 2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-59) 2. DP-scanning first (front) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action The settings of the Check the settings of the adjust- 1.
Page 572 2LB/2K9-5 3. DP-scanning second (back) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action The settings of the Check the settings of the adjust- 1. Deactivate EcoPrint if it is activated. Or, if adjustment of den- ment of density. the density is too low, chosse an image sity quality that suits the original docuemt in type.
Page 573: The Background Is Colored
2LB/2K9-5 (4) The background is colored. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document 1. Check if the background 1. If the background density of the original density of the original document is too dense, perform automatic document is too dense.
Page 574 2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-59) 2. DP-scanning first (front) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document 1. Check if the background 1. If the background density of the original density of the original document is too dense, perform automatic document is too dense.
Page 575 2LB/2K9-5 3. DP-scanning second (back) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document 1. Check if the background 1. If the background density of the original density of the original document is too dense, perform automatic document is too dense. background adjustment.Or, adjust density 2.
Page 576: White Streaks Are Printed Vertically
2LB/2K9-5 (5) White streaks are printed vertically. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace. document is dirty. Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact is dirty.
Page 577 2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Mirror Check whether the mirrors are If the mirrors are dirty, clean the three mirrors. dirty. Lamp unit Check that the lamp unit is con- If dusts are observed on the lamp unit, remove taminated with dusts.
Page 578 2LB/2K9-5 (6) Black or color streaks appear longitudinally. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace. document is dirty. Original document Check if the size of the original If the size of the original document and its document and its reference size reference size do not match, set the correct...
Page 579 2LB/2K9-5 2. DP-scanning first (front) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace. document is dirty. Original document Check if the size of the original If the size of the original document and its document and its reference size reference size do not match, set the correct match.
Page 580 2LB/2K9-5 3. DP-scanning second (back) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action Adjustment of the Check if the outer areas of the 1. Perform maintenance mode U072, CIS. scanner original document have streaks (see page 1-3-61) 2. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP or lines.
Page 581: Streaks Are Printed Horizontally
2LB/2K9-5 (7) Streaks are printed horizontally. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace. document is dirty. Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact is dirty.
Page 582 2LB/2K9-5 2. DP-scanning first (front) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace. document is dirty. Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact is dirty.
Page 583: Print Example
2LB/2K9-5 (8) One side of the print image is darker or brighter than the other. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace. document is dirty. Original document Check if the original document If the original document has foldings or...
Page 584 2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action ISC PWB The ISC PWB is defective. Replace the ISC PWB and perform U411. (see page 1-3-161) CCD PWB The CCD PWB is defective. Replace the ISU and perform U411. (see page 1-3-161) Main PWB The main PWB is defective.
Page 585 2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action DP_CIS CIS is defective. Replace the CIS and perform U091 and U411. (see page 1-3-66,1-3-161) Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-59) 1-4-235...
Page 586 2LB/2K9-5 (9) Black or color dots appear on the image. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace. document is dirty. Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dirty, clean the contact is dirty.
Page 587 2LB/2K9-5 3. DP-scanning second (back) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check whether the original If the original document is dirty, replace. document is dirty. DP_SHD PWB Check the CIS and the SHD Reinsert the connector if the PWB was loosely PWB is properly connected.
Page 588: Image Is Blurred
2LB/2K9-5 (10) Image is blurred. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Rail Check that the carriage is If the carriage does not travel smoothly, smoothly operative. remove foreign objects on the front and back optical rails. Lamp unit Check that the carriage is If the carriage does not travel smoothly...
Page 589 2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action DP document mat Check the location the document Re-mount the document mat of the DP if it is mat of the DP is mounted. hanged off. Original document Check that the leading edge of If the leading edge of the original documet is the original document is dog- dog-eared, straighten.
Page 590: The Leading Edge Of The Image Is Consistently Misaligned With The Original
2LB/2K9-5 (11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not properly placed loaded correctly on the contact on the contact glass, place it correctly.
Page 591 2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action DP drive motor Check whether the DP drive If the DP motor is fluctuated in rotation, apply motor is fluctuated in rotation. grease with the drive gear. If no improvement is observed, replace the motor. 3.
Page 592 2LB/2K9-5 (12) Part of image is missing. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not properly placed loaded correctly on the contact on the contact glass, place it correctly. glass.
Page 593 2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Main PWB The main PWB is defective. Replace the main PWB.(see page 1-5-59) 2. DP-scanning first (front) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not properly placed loaded correctly in the DP.
Page 594 2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Settings of Border Check the value of border If a large value is given to bordere erasure, removal removal. change it to a smaller value. DP_SATA cable Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if it its connection is the SHD PWB and I/F PWB is loose.
Page 595: Image Is Out Of Focus
2LB/2K9-5 (13) Image is out of focus. Print example 1. Table scanning and DP-scanning first (front) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check whether the original If the original document is wavy, straighten.Or, document is wavy. replace the original document. Contact glass Check whether the contact glass If the contact glass is dew condensed, remove...
Page 596 2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Adjustment of the Check the automatic adjustment Perform maintenance mode U411, scanner of the scanner. DP FaceDown(Chart1)_All. (see page 1-3-161) DP_CIS unit Check the location the CIS unit Re-mount the CIS unit if it is hanged off. is mounted.
Page 597: Image Center Does Not Align With The Original Center
2LB/2K9-5 (14) Image center does not align with the original center. Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not properly placed loaded correctly on the contact on the contact glass, place it correctly.
Page 598 2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Adjustment of the Check the scanning adjustment 1. Perform maintenance mode U072, CIS . scanner of DP scanning. (see page 1-3-61) 2. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP Auto Adj. 3. Perform maintenance mode U411, DP FaceDown (Chart1)_All.
Page 599 2LB/2K9-5 2. DP-scanning first (front) page Defective part Check description Corrective Action DP conveying pul- Check that the conveying pulley If the conveying pulley does not rotate is smoothly operative. smoothly, re-asslemble the conveying roller and springs. Adjustment height Check the height of the front and If the front and back side of the DP is not of the hinge back portions of the DP.
Page 600 2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action DP document mat Check the location the document Re-mount the document mat of the DP if it is mat of the DP is mounted. hanged off. Original document Check that the leading edge of If the leading edge of the original documet is the original document is dog- dog-eared, straighten.
Page 601 2LB/2K9-5 (16) Moire Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Settings of print Confirm whether the moire Switch print quality mode if the moire varies quality mode varies depending on print quality depending on print quality mode. mode.
Page 602: Skewed Image
2LB/2K9-5 (17) Skewed image Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action Original document Check if the original document is If the original document is not placed askew on fed askew. the contact glass, place it correctly. Adjustment of Check the scanner unit is quite If the scanner unit is not quite level, perform...
Page 603 2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Adjustment posi- Check the front and back adjust- If the front and back adjustment positions of tions of the hinge ment positions of the right hinge. the right hinge are improper, perform adjustment. 3.
Page 604 2LB/2K9-5 (18) Abnormal image Print example 1. Table scanning Defective part Check description Corrective Action FFC cable CCD Check the FFC cable between Reinsert the connector if its connection is the CCD sensor and ISC PWB is loose. Or, if conduction is lot, replace the wire. properly connected.
Page 605 2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Check the wires to the HDD in 1. Reinsert the connector if its connection is conduction. Check the connector loose. for connection. Check the con- 2. Check the wires and connetctors, and nector pins for distortion. replace if faulty.
Page 606 2LB/2K9-5 1-4-6 Poor image (Image rendering problems: Mono-color printer engine) (1) No image (2) No image (3) Image is too (4) The back- (5) White streaks appears appears light. ground is col- are printed ver- (entirely white). (entirely black). ored. tically.
Page 607: No Image Appears (Entirely White)
2LB/2K9-5 (1) No image appears (entirely white). Print example Cause of trouble 1. No or defective developing bias output. 2. Failure of the rotation of the developing roller. 3. Defective primary transfer. 4. Laser is not dispersed from the laser scanner unit (LSU). 5.
Page 608: Laser Scanner Unit (Lsu)
2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Laser scanner unit Check the connection of the con- 1. Reinsert the FFC wire if it its connection is (LSU) nectors. loose. Or, verify conduction of the Replace the cable if it has no conduction. wires.
Page 609 2LB/2K9-5 (2) No image appears (entirely black). Print example Cause of trouble 1. No main charging. 2. The laser from the LSU is activated simultaneously for all colors. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Charging roller Check whether the charging If the charging roller is not fixed properly, fix the roller is properly mounted.
Page 610 2LB/2K9-5 (3) Image is too light. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Variance in environments (dew formation). 2. Toner is under supplied, or deteriorated in quality.(Under charged) 3. The volatage of the developing bias is too low. 4. The volatage of the primary transfer current is too low. 5.
Page 611 2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Toner container Shake the toner container up If the message prompting toner replenishing is and down approx. 10 times, and shown, the toner inlet is not open, replace the check the following: toner container. 1.
Page 612: The Background Is Colored
2LB/2K9-5 (4) The background is colored. Print example 要因 1. Toner is deteriorated in quality (under-charged). 2. Toner is over-supplied. 3. Developing bias is too high. 4. The layer of toner is too thick on the developing roller (too much toner). 5.
Page 613 2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action High-voltage The developing bias and charg- Replace the high-voltage PWB1. PWB1 ing current supplied by the high- (see page 1-5-69) voltage PWB1 is faulty. Engine PWB The engine PWB is defective. Replace the enging PWB. (see page 1-5-65) Toner supply motor Check if the toner supply motor If the harnesses are short-circuited and the is continuously rotating.Check...
Page 614: White Streaks Are Printed Vertically
2LB/2K9-5 (5) White streaks are printed vertically. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Dirty LSU slit glass. 2. Foreign objects inside the developer unit. 3. Internal contamination 4. Dirty drum unit inside. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Check if the LSU slit glass is If the LSU slit glass is dirty, dirty.
Page 615 2LB/2K9-5 (6) Black or color streaks appear longitudinally. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Dirty charging roller 2. Flawed or dirty drum unit 3. Damaged or paper dust bitten cleaning blade Defective part Check description Corrective Action Charging roller unit Check if there is no toner streaks If the charging roller has streaks on its surface, on the surface of the charging clean the charging roller.
Page 616 2LB/2K9-5 (7) Black, white or color streaks appear horizontally. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Dirty developer unit or terminals 2. Flawed or dirty drum unit Improper grounding 3. Dirty primary transfer roller terminals Defective part Check description Corrective Action Developer unit 1.
Page 617 2LB/2K9-5 (8) Uneven density longitudinally. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Dirty LSU inside 2. The transfer belt is not pressed against the drum properly. 3. Drum condensation. Defective part Check description Corrective Action The emission of laser dispersed Replace the LSU.(Perform U119) from the LSU is not even.
Page 618 2LB/2K9-5 (9) Uneven density horizontally. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Defective laser scanner unit. 2. Improper charging roller rotation 3. Improper contact on the developer unit terminals Defective part Check description Corrective Action Check if the emission of laser is Replace the LSU.
Page 619: Offset Occurs
2LB/2K9-5 Defective part Check description Corrective Action Developer unit 1. Check if that the developing Execute AC calibration by U140. bias is leaked. (see page 1-3-88) 2. Check the print image on 1. If the print image on paper has a problem paper has a problem at an at an interval equivalent to the interval equivalent to the...
Page 620 2LB/2K9-5 (12) Part of Image is missing. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Flawed or dirty drum unit. 2. Deformed or dirty primary transfer roller on its surface. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Drum unit Check the print image on paper If the print image on paper has a problem at an has a problem at an interval interval equivalent to the circumference of the...
Page 621 2LB/2K9-5 (14) Poor grayscale reproducibility. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Poor image adjustment. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Image adjustment Check if color adjustment is Execute maintenance modes U464 Calibration insufficient. and U410 Grayscale Adjustment. (see page 1- 3-179,1-3-159) (15) Unevenly repeating horizontal streaks in the printed objects.Colored spots in the printed objects.
Page 622 2LB/2K9-5 1-4-7 Poor image (Caused by transferring toner, paper conveying, or fusing: Four-color printer engine) (1) No image (2) Image is too (3) The back- (4) White streaks (5) Black or color appears light. ground is col- are printed ver- streaks appear (entirely white).
Page 623 2LB/2K9-5 (14) Image is partly (15)Fusing is loose. (16) Image is out of (17)Image center missing focus. does not align with (Outlines the original center. objects and white dots). See page1-4-285 See page1-4-286 See page1-4-287 See page1-4-287 (18)Dirty paper edges with toner. (19)Inferior color (20)Shifted colors.
Page 624 2LB/2K9-5 (1) No image appears (entirely white). Print example Cause of trouble 1. Defective secondary transfer bias output. 2. The secondary transfer roller is not pressurized. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Secondary transfer Check if the right side conveying If the conveying unit has not been closed, roller unit is closed.
Page 625 2LB/2K9-5 (2) Image is too light. Print example Cause of trouble 1. The paper absorbs moisture. 2. The contact pressure at the secondary trasnfer roller and the intermediate transfer belt is too low. 3. The voltage applied to the secondary transfer current is incorrect. Defective part Check description Corrective Action...
Page 626 2LB/2K9-5 (3) The background is colored. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Defective intermediate transfer belt unit grounding. 2. Dirty secondary transfer roller. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Intermediate trans- 1. Check if the belt is bleached Increase the U140 MagDC value if the U140 fer belt unit on its surface.
Page 627 2LB/2K9-5 (5) Black or color streaks appear longitudinally. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Poor voltage applied for intermediate transfer belt cleaning. 2. Dirty secondary transfer roller. 3. Dirty separation brush. 4. Dirty fuser unit inside. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Intermediate trans- Check if paper dusts have...
Page 628 2LB/2K9-5 (6) Black, white or color streaks appear horizontally. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Defective intermediate transfer belt unit grounding. 2. Dirty secondary transfer roller. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Intermediate trans- Check if the phenomenon 1. If the print image has a problem, clean the fer belt unit appears at a pitch of the intermediate transfer belt by a soft cloth.
Page 629 2LB/2K9-5 (7) Uneven transferring toner. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Defective intermediate transfer belt unit grounding. 2. Dirty secondary transfer roller. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Intermediate trans- Check if paper dusts have 1. If paper dusts are accumulated, clean the fer belt unit accumulated at the proximity of pre-brush by removing the cleaning cover.
Page 630 2LB/2K9-5 (8) Black or color dots appear on the image. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Flawed or dirty transfer belt. 2. Dirty secondary transfer roller. 3. Dirty Fuser unit inside. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Intermediate trans- Check the intermediate transfer 1.
Page 631 2LB/2K9-5 (9) Image is blurred (Shifted transferring). Print example Cause of trouble 1. The paper used does not conform to the requirement. 2. Imbalanced fuser unit pressures. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Paper 1. Check that the type of the 1.
Page 632: The Leading Edge Of The Image Is Sporadically Misaligned With The Original
2LB/2K9-5 (10) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Improperly adjusted leading edge timing. 2. Improper amount of slack of the original document in front of the registration. Defective part Check description Corrective Action Regist roller...
Page 633: Paper Is Wrinkled
2LB/2K9-5 (12) Paper is wrinkled. Print example Defective part Check description Corrective Action Paper-width guides Check the paper-width guides If the width adjuster cursors are not flush with are flush with the paper. paper, set them correctly. Paper 1. Check if paper is curled or 1.
Page 634 2LB/2K9-5 (13) Offset occurs. Print example Defective part Check description Corrective Action Paper 1. Check that the type of the 1. If the type of the paper being used falls paper used falls within the outside the requirements, replace and use range of specifications.
Page 635 2LB/2K9-5 (14) Image is partly missing (Outlines objects and white dots). Print example Defective part Check description Corrective Action Paper 1. If the paper is damp, replace.Choose a dry 1. Check that the paper has moisture absorbed. place to store paper. 2.
Page 636: Fusing Is Loose
2LB/2K9-5 (15) Fusing is loose. Print example Defective part Check description Corrective Action Paper 1. Check that the type of the 1. If the type of the paper being used falls paper used falls within the outside the requirements, replace and use range of specifications.
Page 637 2LB/2K9-5 (16) Image is out of focus. Print example Defective part Check description Corrective Action Paper 1. If the paper is damp, replace. 1. Check that the paper has moisture absorbed. Choose a dry place to store paper. 2. Check that the paper has 2.
Page 638 2LB/2K9-5 (18) Dirty paper edges with toner. Print example Cause of trouble 1. Toner scattering due to an internal temperature increase.(Developer unit) Defective part Check description Corrective Action Conveying guide Check if the conveying guide is If the conveying guide is dirty with toner, clean dirty with toner.
Page 639 2LB/2K9-5 (19) Inferior color reproducibility. Print example Defective part Check description Corrective Action Paper Check that the paper has 1. If the paper is damp, replace. moisture absorbed. Choose a dry place to store paper. Check that the paper has stored 2.
Page 640 2LB/2K9-5 (20) Shifted colors. Print example Cause of trouble 1. False detection of the velocity of rotation of the transfer belt.(Noise) Defective part Check description Corrective Action Color Regist Check if U469 Color Regist If U469 Color Registration adjustment has not Adjustment Adjustment is performed after been done, perform U464 Calibration, then...
Page 641: Electric Problems
2LB/2K9 1-4-8 Electric problems If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement. Troubleshooting to each failure must be in the order of the numbered symptoms. Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures 1. No electricity at the Measure the input voltage.
Page 642 2LB/2K9 Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the Middle motor does cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable. not operate. tact in the connector. Middle motor and feed PWB 2 (YC7) Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4) 2.
Page 643 2LB/2K9 Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the BR conveying cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable. motor 1 does not tact in the connector. BR conveying motor 1 and BR main PWB (YC7) operate.
Page 644 2LB/2K9 Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures (13) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the Developer fan cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable. motor K/M/C/Y tact in the connector. Developer fan motor K/M/C/Y and retainer PWB (YC2) does not operate.
Page 645 2LB/2K9 Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures (19) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the Eject rear fan cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable. motor does not tact in the connector. Eject rear fan motor and feed PWB 1 (YC19) operate.
Page 646 2LB/2K9 Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures (25) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the Paper conveying cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable. clutch does not tact in the connector. Paper conveying clutch and feed PWB 2 (YC5) operate.
Page 647 2LB/2K9 Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures (31) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the Cleaning solenoid cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable. does not operate. tact in the connector. Cleaning solenoid and feed PWB 1 (YC10) Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4) 2.
Page 648 2LB/2K9 Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures (37) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the The message cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable. requesting paper to tact in the connector. MP paper sensor and relay PWB (YC3) be loaded is shown Relay PWB (YC12) and feed PWB 1 (YC17) when paper is...
Page 649 2LB/2K9 Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures (41) 1. A piece of paper torn Check visually and remove it, if any. A paper jam in the from paper is caught paper feed, paper around feed sensor conveying, feed- 1, 2, MP feed sensor, shift or eject sec- middle sensor, paper tions is indicated...
Page 650 2LB/2K9 Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures (46) 1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the A message indicat- cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable. ing unit open is dis- tact in the connector. PF paper conveying unit switch and PF main PWB (YC14) played when the 2.
Page 651 2LB/2K9 Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures (52) Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the 1. Defective connector DP conveying cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable. tact in the connector. motor does not DP conveying motor and DP main PWB (YC14) operate.
Page 652 2LB/2K9 Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures (58) Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the 1. Defective connector The size of the cable or poor con- connector cable. If none, replace the cable. tact in the connector. original on the DP DP original width switch and DP main PWB (YC2) is not displayed DP original length switch and DP main PWB (YC2)
Page 653: Mechanical Problems
2LB/2K9 1-4-9 Mechanical problems If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement. Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures Check if the surfaces of the following roll- Clean with isopropyl alcohol. No primary paper ers are dirty with paper powder.
Page 654: Send Error Code
2LB/2K9 1-4-10 Send error code This section describes the scanning errors and descriptions, preventive actions, as well as corrective actions. Error codes not described here could fall within software errors. If such an error is encountered, turn power off then on, and advise the service representative. (1) Scan to SMB error codes Code Contents...
Page 655 2LB/2K9 (2) Scan to FTP error codes Code Contents Check procedures/corrective measures 1101 FTP server does not exist on the net- 1. Check the FTP server name. work. 2. Confirm device's network parameters. 3. Confirm the network parameters the device is con- nected.
Page 656: Scan To E-Mail Error Codes
2LB/2K9 Code Contents Check procedures/corrective measures 2231 Connection with the FTP server has 1. Confirm device's network parameters. failed. 2. Confirm the network parameters the device is con- (FTPS communication) nected. 3101 FTP server responded with an error. 1. Confirm device's network parameters. 2.
Page 657 2LB/2K9-5 Code Contents Check procedures/corrective measures 2202 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server 1. Confirm device's network parameters. has failed. 2. Confirm the network parameters the device is con- (Timeout) nected. 2204 The size of scanning exceeded its limit. 1. Confirm device's network parameters. 3101 SMTP/POP3 server responded with an 1.
Page 658: Error Code
2LB/2K9 1-4-11 Error codes (1) Error code Error codes are listed on the communication reports, activity report, etc. The codes consist of an error code indication U followed by a 5-digit number. (Error codes for V34 communication errors start with an E indica- tion, followed by five digits.) The upper three of the five digits indicate general classification of the error and its cause, while the lower two indicate the detailed classification.
Page 659 2LB/2K9 (2) Table of general classification Error code Description U00000 No response or busy after the set number of redials. U00100 Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key. U00200 Reception was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key. U00300 Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.
Page 660 2LB/2K9 Error code Description U04000 In interoffice subaddress-based transmission mode, the specified subaddress box num- ber was not registered in the destination unit. U04100 Subaddress-based transmission failed because the destination unit had no subaddress- based reception capability. U04200 In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the desti- nation unit.
Page 661: U004Xx Error Code Table: Interrupted Phase B
2LB/2K9 (2-1) U004XX error code table: Interrupted phase B Error code Description U00430 Polling request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permit number. Or, subaddress-based bulletin board transmission request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permit ID in the transmitting unit. U00431 An subaddress-based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified subaddress confidential box was not registered.
Page 662: U010Xx Error Code Table: G3 Transmission
2LB/2K9 (2-5) U010XX error code table: G3 transmission Error code Description U01000 An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at 2400 bps. Or, an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP) after transmission at 2400 bps.
Page 663: U011Xx Error Code Table: G3 Reception
2LB/2K9 (2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception Error code Description U01100 Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DCS signal. U01101 Function of the unit (excl. communication mode select) differs from that indicated by an NSS signal. U01102 A DTC (NSC) signal was received when no transmission data was in the unit.
Page 664: U017Xx Error Code Table: V.34 Transmission
2LB/2K9 (2-7) U017XX error code table: V.34 transmission Error code Description U01700 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing). U01720 A communication error occurred in phase 4 (modem parameter exchange). U01721 Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed between units.
Page 665 2LB/2K9 1-4-12 Printing System Troubleshooting Check procedures/corrective Problem Contents Causes measures 1.Error 1020 is dis- Bridge board mem- Replace the bridge board Bridge board mounting ory check error. check for correct operation. played. error. 2.Error 1030 is dis- Printing system Printing system is not pow- Check power cable connection or played.
Page 666 2LB/2K9 Check procedures/corrective Problem Contents Causes measures 8.Error 3000 is dis- The initial parame- The initial parameters (IP Switch Printing system power off played. ters of Printing sys- addresses, ports, etc.) do then on again. tem error. not match with the MFP firmware and the Printing system firmware.
Page 667 2LB/2K9 Check procedures/corrective Problem Contents Causes measures 9.“Fiery” is not Connection error of Wiring failure or loose con- Reinsert the connector. Also shown on the MFP the harness nection. check for continuity within the application. between the Main connector cable. If none, replace board and the the cable.
Page 668 2LB/2K9 Check procedures/corrective Problem Contents Causes measures 11.Printing is not Defective bridge Bridge board mounting Replace the bridge board. possible with Com- board. error. mand Work Station. Defective main Main board mounting error. Replace the main board. board. Defective Printing Board mounting failure in Replace the Printing system.
Page 669: Precautions For Assembly And Disassembly
2LB/2K9 1-5 Assembly and disassembly 1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly (1) Precautions Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power lamp is off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. When the fax kit is installed, be sure to disconnect the modular cable before starting disassembly.
Page 670: How To Tell A Genuine Kyocera Toner Container
A black-colored band when seen through the left side window ( A shiny or gold-colored band when seen through the right side window ( The above will reveal that the toner container is a genuine Kyocera branded toner container, otherwise, it is a counterfeit.
Page 671: Paper Feed Section
2LB/2K9 1-5-2 Paper feed section (1) Detaching and refitting the primary paper feed unit and PF primary paper feed unit Procedure 1. Pull the cassette 1 to 4 out completely. Strap 2. Pull the paper conveying unit out. 3. Open the paper conveying cover. 4.
Page 672 2LB/2K9-2 7. Remove the rear upper cover and the rear lower cover (see page 1-5-74). 8. Remove the screw of the right middle rear cover. 9. Unhook two hooks using a flat blade Interface screwdriver and then remove the inter- cover face cover 10.
Page 673 2LB/2K9 15. Release the wire saddle. 16. Remove two connectors. Connector Wire saddle Connector Figure 1-5-7 Detaching the primary paper feed unit 17. Remove two screws each from primary paper feed unit. Primary paper feed unit 18. Remove the primary paper feed unit. Screws Primary paper feed unit...
Page 674 2LB/2K9 19. Check or replace the primary paper Driving coupler feed unit and refit all the removed parts. *: When refit the primary paper feed unit, you must confirm the inserted pin to the driving coupler. *: You must install the primary paper feed Driving coupler unit while pushing the retard release lever of the lower side, when the pri-...
Page 675 2LB/2K9 Detaching the PF primary paper feed unit 21. Remove the wire holder. 22. Remove the connector. Connector Figure 1-5-10 23. Remove two screws from PF primary PF primary paper feed unit. paper feed unit 24. Remove the PF primary paper feed unit.
Page 676 2LB/2K9 25. Check or replace the PF primary paper feed unit and refit all the removed parts. *: When refit the PF primary paper feed unit, you must confirm the inserted pin Driving coupler to the driving coupler. *: You must install the PF primary paper feed unit while pushing the retard PF primary release lever of the lower side, when...
Page 677 2LB/2K9 (2) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley, separation pulley, PF forwarding pulley (right), PF paper feed pulley (right) and PF separation pulley (right). Procedure 1. Remove the primary paper feed unit or Paper feed pulley PF primary paper feed unit (see page 1- Feed gear 5-3).
Page 678 2LB/2K9-2 (3) Detaching and refitting the PF forwarding pulley (left), PF paper feed pulley (left) and PF separation pulley (left). Procedure 1. Pull out cassette3 and 4 completely. 2. Pull the PF paper conveying unit. Stopper 3. Remove the screw and remove the Screw stopper.
Page 679 2LB/2K9 7. Remove the stop ring A and then PF paper feed pulley remove the one way clutch and the PF Feed gear paper feed pulley (left). Oneway clutch Z30R OW 8. Remove the stop ring B and then remove the PF forwarding pulley (left). Stop ring A Primary paper PF forwarding pulley...
Page 680: Detaching And Refitting The Mp Tray Paper Feed Unit
2LB/2K9 (4) Detaching and refitting the MP tray paper feed unit Procedure 1. Pull the paper conveying unit out. Screws 2. Open the MP tray. 3. Remove four screws. Screw MP tray Paper conveying unit Figure 1-5-19 4. Unhook eight hooks and then remove Right cover the right cover and DU cover assembly.
Page 681 2LB/2K9 5. Remove two connectors. Connecor 6. Release the wire saddle. 7. Remove the wire saddle. *: To refit the wire saddle, be sure to fit in the positioning hole that was previously used. Wire saddle Connecor Installation hole Wire saddle Figure 1-5-21 8.
Page 682 2LB/2K9 9. Remove two screws. 10. Remove the MP tray paper feed unit. Screw MP tray paper feed unit Screw MP tray paper feed unit Figure 1-5-23 1-5-14...
Page 683: Detaching And Refitting The Mp Forwarding Pulley, Mp Paper Feed Pulley And Mp Separation Pulley
2LB/2K9 (5) Detaching and refitting the MP forwarding pulley, MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pulley Procedure DU lower guide 1. Remove the MP tray paper feed unit (see page 1-5-10). Detaching the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley 2.
Page 684 2LB/2K9 6. Unhook the hook of the feed holder Spring assembly. Hook 7. Remove the spring and the feed holder assembly from the top base. Feed holder assembly Top base Top base Spring Hook Figure 1-5-26 MP paper feed pulley Oneway gear 8.
Page 685 2LB/2K9 11. Remove the pickup MPF shaft from the Pickup MFP shaft axis holes of feed MPF holder. MP forwarding pulley 12. Pull the pickup gear Z30R and MP for- warding pulley out from the pickup MFP shaft. Pickup gear Z30R Feed gear Z26H Axis hole Feed MPF holder...
Page 686 2LB/2K9 14. Remove the spring. 15. Release the uniting of joint by sliding the retard holder assembly. Joint Retard holder assembly Spring Figure 1-5-30 16. Remove the retard holder assembly by turning it as shown. Retard holder assembly Figure 1-5-31 1-5-18...
Page 687 2LB/2K9 17. Remove two stop rings. Retard MPF shaft 18. Remove two bushes. 19. Pull the retard MPF shaft out and then remove the torque limiter and the MP Torque limiter separation pulley. MP separation 20. Clean or replace the MP forwarding pul- pulley ley, MP paper feed pulley and MP sepa- ration pulley.
Page 688: Optical Section
2LB/2K9 1-5-3 Optical section (1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp Notes on handling the LED mount assembly Do not touch the diffusion seat and the light guid- Diffusion seat LED mount assembly ing plate. Light guiding Use air blow when you clean the diffusion seat, plate the light guiding plate, and reflector.
Page 689 2LB/2K9 4. Remove the screw and then operation ISU rear cover Screw mount cover C Screw 5. Open the bridge eject cover. 6. Remove two screws and then remove Screw the ISU rear cover. Operation mount Bridge eject cover cover C Figure 1-5-35 7.
Page 690 2LB/2K9 9. Move the LED mount assembly to the LED mount assembly Cutting lack part cutting lack part. 10. Unhook the hook and remove the FFC cover from LED mount assembly. 11. Remove the FFC from the FFC connec- tor. 12.
Page 691: Detaching And Refitting The Scanner Wires
2LB/2K9-4 (2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires NOTE When fitting the wires, be sure to use those specified below. Machine front: (P/N: 302H717381), gray Machine rear: (P/N: 302H717391), black Fitting requires the following tools Two frame securing tools (P/N 302FZ17100) Two scanner wire stoppers (P/N 3596811) Procedure 1.
Page 692: Fitting The Scanner Wires
2LB/2K9-4 4. Remove the round terminals from the Round terminal scanner wire springs on scanner unit Round terminal left side. 5. Remove the scanner wire. Red-marked Red-marked Scanner wire spring Scanner wire spring Figure 1-5-40 Fitting the scanner wires 6. Move the mirror 2 frame as shown in Frame securing tool the figure and insert two frame securing tools into the positioning holes at the...
Page 693 2LB/2K9-4 7. Hook the round terminals (Non-red-marked) onto the catches inside of the scanner unit.(1) 8. Loop the scanner wires around the outer grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame, winding from below to above....(2) 9. Loop the scanner wire around the groove in the scanner wire pulley at the scanner unit right, winding from above to below....
Page 694 2LB/2K9-4 18. Remove the two scanner wire stoppers and frame securing tools. 19. Focusing on the locating ball of the wire drum, move aside the wires to inside. 20. Move the mirror 2 frame from side to side to correctly locate the wires in posi- tion.
Page 695 2LB/2K9-2 (3) Detaching and refitting the ISU Procedure Detaching the ISU Screws Screw 1. Worn the electrostatic prevention band for the destruction prevention of the Lens cover CCD board by static electricity. 2. Remove the platen (see page 1-5-20). Screw 3.
Page 696 2LB/2K9-4 6. Remove four screws and then remove the ISU. Screw Screw Screw Screw Figure 1-5-46 Refitting the ISU 1. Install the FFT. *: The FFT should be inserted while hold- ing the position (A) shown in the illustra- tion (A). Figure 1-5-47 1-5-28...
Page 697 2LB/2K9-4 2. Decide the fix position of ISU by the fol- lowing. The right and left of machine: Verify the number prefixed by a (a) mark. Match the line (c) of ISU to the position- ing line (b) of same number on frame side.
Page 698 2LB/2K9-4 5. The CCD unit Height Adjustment 1 In case a part of the image is whitish from the leading edge or the background image appears like the illustration “a” . The replacement ISU comes complete with a ISU(CCD unit) large spacer (B) and a small spacer (C).
Page 699 2LB/2K9-4 7. The CCD unit Height Adjustment 2 In case of white vertical lines appear like the illustration “b” on page 1. 1. Set the spacer (large)(B) into the out- side screw holes at the lens side. 2. Check the image. Figure 1-5-53 8.
Page 700: Detaching And Refitting The Lsu
2LB/2K9-2 (4) Detaching and refitting the LSU Procedure 1. Remove the rear upper unit (see page 1-5-74). 2. Remove the controller cover. 3. Remove the screw and then remove the controller lid. Screw Controller lid Controller cover Figure 1-5-55 4. Remove three screws. 5.
Page 701 2LB/2K9-5 6. Remove four screws and then remove the LSU retainer. Screws LSU retainer Screws Figure 1-5-57 7. Remove two screws and then remove the middle feed plate and the middle feed plate B. 8. Remove two LSU retainer pins and two springs.
Page 702 2LB/2K9 9. Pull the LSU out a little. 10. Remove the following connector from the LSU. FFC connector with a lock: 2pcs Connector: 2pcs *: When remove the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock, removing it after release the lock by lifting the lock lever Connectors FFC connector with a lock...
Page 703 2LB/2K9 12. Remove seven screws and then Screws remove the LSU mount lid. Screws Screws LSU mount lid Screw Figure 1-5-61 13. Remove the screw. 14. Unhook four hooks and then remove the LSU relay PWB cover. Screw Hooks LSU relay PWB cover Hooks Figure 1-5-62 1-5-35...
Page 704 2LB/2K9 LSU(K) 15. Remove all the connectors and the FFC connectors with a lock. *: When remove the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock, removing it after release the lock by lifting the lock lever *: For the 75 ppm model, detach two FFC connectors from LSU (K).
Page 705 2LB/2K9-2 LSU (rear side) LSU (front side) 20. Wrap an antistatic discharging belt Support around your wrist to prevent damage to portions the LSU. *: Do not touch terminals and FFC con- tacts in the APC PWB of the LSU. 21.
Page 706: Color Registration Adjustment
2LB/2K9 (5) Color registration adjustment Follow the procedure below to replace the laser scanner unit. Procedure 1. Press the system menu key. 2. Press [Adjustment/Maintenance], [Calibration] and then [Start]. Calibration begins. Auto correction 3. Press [Color Registration], [Auto] and then [Start]. A chart is printed. 4.
Page 707 2LB/2K9 8. Press [Chart] and [Print] to print a chart. 9. Verify that each scale is within the range of 1to A. If they are within the range, proceed to step 10. If scales are out of range, repeat steps 6 through 9.
Page 708 2LB/2K9-2 12. Remove the inner unit (see page 1-5-41). 13. Rotate the adjustment knob using a 5 mm hex wrench. Direction of rotation (V-1 - V-5) >= 2 scales (sample 1): rotate counterclockwise. (V-1 - V-5) <= -2 scales (sample 2): rotate clockwise. Number of rotation (V-1- V-5) x 4 clicks 14.
Page 709: Image Formation Section
2LB/2K9 1-5-4 Image formation section (1) Detaching and refitting the inner unit Procedure 1. Open the front upper cover. Lock 2. Remove toner container. lever 3. Unlock the front middle cover locking by sliding the lock lever to the left. 4.
Page 710 2LB/2K9-1 7. Remove the screw and then open the Screw front middle cover. 8. Lock the developer waste exit that was unlocked (see page 1-2-25). Front middle cover Front middle cover Figure 1-5-74 9. Release the inner unit by pulling the lock lever and remove the inner unit.
Page 711 2LB/2K9-2 10. Close four toner supply shutters of the inner unit. Inner unit 11. Lift the inner unit and take it off of the slider rail pins on both sides. Toner supply shutter Slider rail Caution When re-inserting the inner unit, make sure the unit is correctly inserted.
Page 712: Detaching And Refitting The Developer Unit And Drum Unit
2LB/2K9 (2) Detaching and refitting the developer unit and drum unit Detaching example: Developer unit Y and Drum unit Y Procedure Connector 1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5- 55). Connector 2. Pull the transfer belt unit out a little (see page 1-5-48).
Page 713 2LB/2K9 8. Remove the drum unit from the devel- oper unit. Drum unit 9. Check or replace the drum unit and the developer unit and refit all the removed parts. 10. When replacing the new developer unit, proceed as follows: 1)Performs maintenance mode U140 (AC calibration) (see page 1-3-95).
Page 714: Detaching And Refitting The Charger Roller Unit
2LB/2K9 (3) Detaching and refitting the charger roller unit Detaching example: Charger roller unit Y Procedure 1. Remove the inner unit (see page 1-5- 41). 2. Pull out the charger roller unit by pick- ing and releasing the MC lock lever. 3.
Page 715: Transfer Section
2LB/2K9-1 1-5-5 Transfer section (1) Detaching and refitting the paper conveying unit Procedure 1. Pull the paper conveying unit out. Paper conveying unit 2. Remove three screws. 3. Unhook three hooks and then remove Right front cover the right front cover. Screw Hook Hook...
Page 716 2LB/2K9-1 5. Remove four screws. Paper conveying unit 6. Remove the paper conveying unit by lifting upward. Screws Screws Paper conveying unit Figure 1-5-84 1-5-48...
Page 717: Detaching And Refitting The Transfer Belt Unit
2LB/2K9 (2) Detaching and refitting the transfer belt unit Procedure 1. Remove the paper conveying unit (see page 1-5-47). 2. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5- 55). 3. Remove the connector. Connector Figure 1-5-85 4. Pull out the transfer belt unit by lifting up both ends.
Page 718 2LB/2K9-1 5. Remove the transfer belt unit. 6. Check or replace the transfer belt unit and refit all the removed parts. *: When refitting the new transfer belt unit, set the projected part aligned with Transfer belt unit the rail entrance. Hold the transfer belt unit at its ends and insert all the way in, then press firmly into the machine.
Page 719 2LB/2K9-1 (3) Detaching and refitting the cleaning pre brush Procedure 1. Remove the transfer belt unit (see page 1-5-49). 2. Unhook the front and back springs from the hooks. Spring Spring Transfer belt unit Figure 1-5-88 3. Unhook two hooks and then remove the cleaning cover.
Page 720 2LB/2K9-1 4. Remove the cleaning pre brush by turn- Cleaning pre brush ing it as shown. 5. Check or replace the cleaning pre brush and refit all the removed parts. Figure 1-5-90 *: Hook the springs back in place onto the Spring cleaning pre brush when installing.
Page 721: Detaching And Refitting The Transfer Roller
2LB/2K9 (4) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller Procedure 1. Pull out the paper conveying unit. Paper conveying unit Figure 1-5-92 2. Loosen two fixed screws on the TC Transfer roller (shaft) Bearing guide. Bearing Stop ring 3. Remove the stop ring. 4.
Page 722 2LB/2K9 7. Check or replace the transfer roller and refit all the removed parts. *: When refitting the transfer roller, con- firm that the terminal of the ground plate is in contact with the ground plate in the frame. 8. When replacing the new transfer roller, proceed as follows: 1)Performs maintenance mode U127 (clearing the transfer counter) (see...
Page 723: Fuser Section
2LB/2K9 1-5-6 Fuser section (1) Detaching and refitting the fuser unit Procedure 1. Pull out the paper conveying unit. 2. Remove the screw and then the fuser wire cover. 3. Remove two connectors Connector Connector Fuser wire cover Screw Paper conveying unit Figure 1-5-95 1-5-55...
Page 724 2LB/2K9 4. Remove two screws (M4 × 12) and then remove the fuser unit. 5. Check or replace the fuser unit and refit all the removed parts. 6. When replacing the new fuser unit, pro- ceed as follows: 1)Performs maintenance mode U167 (clearing the fuser count) (see page 1-3-107).
Page 725 2LB/2K9 (2) Detaching and refitting fuser IH unit Procedure 1. Remove the rear upper cover and the rear lower cover (see page 1-5-74). Fuser IH PWB 2. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5- 55). Wire holder 3. Remove the right upper cover (see page 1-5-74).
Page 726 2LB/2K9 10. Remove two connectors. Ground 11. Release the wire saddle. terminal 12. Remove the screw and the remove the ground terminal. Screw 13. Unhook two hooks and then remove the fuser IH unit. Ground terminal Hook Hook Fuser IH unit Wire saddle Connectors Figure 1-5-98...
Page 727 2LB/2K9-5 1-5-7 PWBs (1) Detaching and refitting the main PWB Procedure 1. Remove the rear upper cover (see page 1-5-74). 2. Remove the controller cover. 3. Remove the screw and then remove the controller lid. Screw Controller lid Controller cover Figure 1-5-99 1-5-59...
Page 728 2LB/2K9 4. Release seven wire saddles on the con- troller box. Wire holder 5. Remove the wire holder. Wire Wire saddles saddles Controller box Wire saddle Wire saddle Figure 1-5-100 1-5-60...
Page 729 2LB/2K9-2 6. Remove the connector from the DP relay PWB, Connector 7. Remove the following connectors that DP relay PWB connected to the main PWB from the outside of the control box. YC25 YC11 YC30 YC24 YC3 (FFC connector with a lock) Controller box YC17 (BK) Main PWB...
Page 730 2LB/2K9-5 8. Remove five screws. 9. Unhook two hooks and then remove the controller box. Controller box Hook Screw Hook Screws Screws Figure 1-5-102 Main PWB 10. Remove the following connectors that connected to the main PWB. YC23 YC27 YC32 YC8 (FFC connector with a lock) YC1 [BLACK] (with a lock) YC2 [BLUE] (with a lock)
Page 731 2LB/2K9 11. Release the wire saddle. Wire holder Wire holder 12. Remove two wire holders. 13. Remove two screws. Fan mootor holder Screws 14. Remove the fan motor holder. Controller box Wire saddle Figure 1-5-104 15. Remove two screws and then remove Screws Main PWB the upper controller box cover and DP...
Page 732 2LB/2K9-2 17. Remove the main PWB by releasing the projection of ground plate in the net- work connector. Network connector 18. Check or replace the main PWB and refit all the removed parts. *: When replacing the main PWB, remove the following devices from the main PWB and then reattach it to the new main PWB (see page 1-6-4).
Page 733: Detaching And Refitting The Engine Pwb
2LB/2K9-2 (2) Detaching and refitting the engine PWB Procedure 1. Remove the controller box (see page 1- 5-59). 2. Remove twenty one connectors of fol- lowing from the engine PWB. YC4 (FFC connector with a lock) YC5 (FFC connector with a lock) YC6 (FFC connector with a lock) Engine PWB YC7 (FFC connector with a lock)
Page 734 2LB/2K9 3. Remove six screws. 4. Unhook hook and board support and then remove the engine PWB. Hook Hook 5. Check or replace the engine PWB and refit all the removed parts. Engine Engine *: When replacing the engine PWB, remove the EEPROM (U100) from the engine PWB and then reattach it to the new engine PWB.
Page 735: Detaching And Refitting The Power Source Pwb
2LB/2K9-2 (3) Detaching and refitting the power source PWB Procedure 1. Remove the rear upper cover (see page 1-5-74). Connectors 2. Remove the toner disposal box (see page 1-5-74). 3. Remove the rear lower cover (see page 1-5-74). Connectors 4. Remove six connectors. 5.
Page 736 2LB/2K9-2 9. Remove screw. 10. Remove cooling duct1. 11. Remove two screws. 12. Remove the power source assembly. Screw Screw Screw Power source assembly Cooling duct1 Figure 1-5-111 2-pin relay connector 13. Release wire saddle. Wire saddles 14. Remove 2-pin relay connector. 15.
Page 737: Detaching And Refitting The High Voltage Pwb
2LB/2K9 (4) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 1 Procedure 1. Remove the power source PWB (see page 1-5-67). 2. Remove the main drive unit (see page 1-5-84). 3. Remove five connectors from high volt- age PWB 1. High voltage PWB 1 Connectors YC18 Connectors...
Page 738 2LB/2K9 (5) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 2 Procedure 1. Remove the main drive unit (see page 1-5-84). 2. Pull the transfer belt unit out a little (see page 1-5-48). 3. Remove two connectors from the high voltage PWB 2 assembly. High voltage PWB 2 assembly High voltage...
Page 739: Detaching And Refitting The Operation Pwb
2LB/2K9 (6) Detaching and refitting the operation PWB Procedure 1. Unhook two hooks and then remove the operation hinge cover A. Operation hinge cover A Operation hinge cover A Hooks Figure 1-5-117 2. Remove two screws of the operation Operation rear lid rear lid.
Page 740 2LB/2K9 4. Remove two screws and then remove Connector the USB wire (connector). 5. Release two wire saddles. 6. Remove the wire holder. Wire saddles 7. Remove three connectors. Wire holder Connectors Screws USB wire (connector) Figure 1-5-119 8. Remove four screws and then remove the operation unit.
Page 741 2LB/2K9 9. Remove four connectors and two FFCs Operation unit from the operation PWB. *: When removing the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock, remove the FFC Operation after released by lifting down the lock lever (see page 1-5-61). Connectors Connectors FFC connector...
Page 742 2LB/2K9 (7) Detaching and refitting the fuser IH PWB Procedure 1. Remove eight screws and then remove the rear upper cover. Rear upper cover Screws Screws Screws Screws Figure 1-5-123 2. Remove the toner disposal box (see page 1-5-55). 3. Remove nine screws. 4.
Page 743 2LB/2K9 6. Remove two screws and then remove Clip Screws the ISU right cover. holder A ISU right cover 7. Remove the clip holder A. 8. Remove the screw and then remove the clip holder B. Screw 9. Unhook three hooks and then remove the right upper cover.
Page 744 2LB/2K9 12. Remove four screws and the remove IH wire cover the fuser IH PWB cover. 13. Remove the IH wire cover. Screws Screws Fuser IH PWB cover Figure 1-5-127 14. Release two wire saddles. 15. Remove four connectors from the fuser IH PWB.
Page 745 2LB/2K9 16. Remove two wire holders. 17. Remove the connector (YC27) from feed PWB 1. Connector (YC27) Feed PWB 1 Wire holder Wire holder Figure 1-5-129 18. Remove three screws. IH box assembly 19. Unhook two hooks and then remove IH box assembly.
Page 746 2LB/2K9 20. Remove two connectors. Screws 21. Remove six screws. 22. Unhook the hook of the board support and then remove fuser IH PWB. Screws 23. Check or replace the fuser IH PWB and Connector refit all the removed parts. Screws Fuser IH Connector...
Page 747 2LB/2K9 (8) Detaching and refitting the PF main PWB and PF power source PWB Procedure 1. Remove three screws and then remove the PF rear cover. Screw Screw PF rear cover Screw Figure 1-5-132 Detaching the PF main PWB 2. Remove all connectors from the PF main PWB.
Page 748 2LB/2K9-2 3. Remove two screws and then remove the PF main PWB from two holder. 4. Check or replace the PF main PWB and refit all the removed parts. 5. Enter maintenance mode U901 after powerup and port the counters on the engine board to the PF board.
Page 749 2LB/2K9 Detaching the PF power source PWB 6. Remove two connectors and two tabs from the PF power source PWB. 7. Remove three screws. 8. Unhook the hook of the board support and then remove PF power source PWB. 9. Check or replace the PF power source PWB and refit all the removed parts.
Page 750: Drive Section
2LB/2K9 1-5-8 Drive section (1) Detaching and refitting the drum drive unit K and drum drive unit M, C, Y Procedure Detaching the drum drive unit K 1. Remove the rear upper cover (see page 1-5-74). 2. Remove the toner disposal box (see page 1-5-74).
Page 751 2LB/2K9-5 Detaching the drum motor K 1. Remove the rear upper cover (see page 1-5-74). 2. Remove the toner disposal box (see page 1-5-118). 3. Remove the rear lower cover (see page 1-5-74). Connector 4. Remove the connector. 5. Release the wire saddle. Wire saddle Figure 1-5-138 6.
Page 752 2LB/2K9 Detaching the drum drive unit M, C, Y 10. Remove the left upper cover (see page 1-5-59). 11. Remove the left cover (see page 1-5- Connector 32). 12. Remove the connector. 13. Remove the screw. Screw Figure 1-5-141 14. Remove two screws and then remove the toner unit duct.
Page 753 2LB/2K9 15. Release two wire saddles. 16. Remove three connectors. Connector Connector Connector Wire saddles Wire saddle Figure 1-5-143 17. Remove each three screws and then remove the drum drive unit M, C and Y. *: Do not have a shaft part alone when you carry drum drive unit.
Page 754 2LB/2K9-5 Detaching the drum motor M, C, Y 19. Remove the toner duct unit (See page - 1-5-84.) 20. Remove the connector. 21. Release the wire saddle. Connector Connector Connector Wire saddle Wire saddle Figure 1-5-145 22. Remove three screws 23.
Page 755: Detaching And Refitting The Main Drive Unit
2LB/2K9 (2) Detaching and refitting the main drive unit Procedure 1. Remove the drum drive unit K and the drum drive unit M, C, Y (see page 1-5- 82). 2. Release four wire saddles on the main drive unit. 3. Remove four connectors. Main drive unit Connector...
Page 756 2LB/2K9 (3) Detaching and refitting the fuser drive unit, transfer drive unit and feed drive unit Procedure Feed PWB 1 Detaching the fuser drive unit assembly 1. Remove the rear upper cover (see page 1-5-74). 2. Remove the toner disposal box (see page 1-5-74).
Page 757 2LB/2K9 7. Remove the FFC from the FFC connec- tor with a lock (YC4) on the engine Engine PWB. Remove the FFC from the FFC connec- FFC connector tor with a lock (YC1) on the feed PWB with a lock (YC4) *: When removing the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock, remove the FFC after released by lifting down the lock...
Page 758 2LB/2K9 10. Remove the connector. 11. Remove three screws. 12. Remove the fuser drive unit. Fuser drive unit Screw Fuser drive unit Connector Screw Screw Figure 1-5-154 Detaching the transfer drive unit 13. Pull out the transfer belt unit a little (see page 1-5-49).
Page 759 2LB/2K9 Detaching the feed drive unit 18. Remove three wire holders from the feed 2 FFC guide. Feed 2 FFC guide Wire holders Figure 1-5-156 19. Remove two screws and then remove the feed 2 FFC guide. Feed 2 FFC guide Screw Screw Screw...
Page 760 2LB/2K9 20. Remove the following nine connectors from the feed PWB 2. YC10 YC11 Feed PWB 2 YC11 YC13 YC12 Feed PWB 2 Figure 1-5-158 21. Remove three screws. 22. Remove the feed drive unit. Feed drive unit Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw...
Page 761 2LB/2K9 23. Check or replace the feed drive unit and refit all the removed parts. *: Connect the connector (yellow) to the Feed drive unit connector of paper feed clutch 1 on stamp [YELLOW] side as before, when removing the connector of the paper feed clutch as the check of the feed drive unit etc.
Page 762 2LB/2K9 (4) Detaching and refitting the PF drive unit Procedure 1. Remove the PF rear cover. (see page 1-5-79) 2. Remove the connector of AC wire from the paper feeder. Connector Figure 1-5-161 3. Remove three wire holders. Wire saddle 4.
Page 763 2LB/2K9 5. Remove the connector and the band of PF paper feed motor. 6. Remove the connector (YC15) from the PF main PWB and then release the wire from two wire saddles. Connector Band PF main PWB YC15 Wire saddles PF main PWB Figure 1-5-163 7.
Page 764 2LB/2K9-5 (5) Detaching and refitting the lift motor 1 and 2 Procedure 1. Remove the power source assembly (see page 1-5-67). 2. Remove the connector each. 3. Remove two screws each and then remove the lift motor 1 and 2. 4.
Page 765 2LB/2K9 (6) Detaching and refitting the PF lift motor 1 and 2 Procedure 1. Remove the PF rear cover (see page 1- 5-79). 2. Remove the connector each. 3. Remove three screws each and then remove the PF lift motor 1 and 2. 4.
Page 766: Detaching And Refitting The Dp Original Feed Belt And Dp Forwarding Pulley
2LB/2K9 1-5-9 DP (1) Detaching and refitting the DP original feed belt and DP forwarding pulley Procedure 1. Open the DP top cover. 2. Remove two screws from the DP origi- DP top cover nal feed guide. Screw Screw DP original feed guide Figure 1-5-167 3.
Page 767 2LB/2K9-5 4. Turns the DP original feed unit upward. DP original feed unit Figure 1-5-169 5. Remove the stop ring from front side of the DP original feed belt shaft A. 6. Pull forwards and then remove the DP original feed unit from the DP. DP original feed unit Stop ring...
Page 768 2LB/2K9 7. Remove the stop ring from the DP origi- DP original feed unit nal feed belt shaft A. 8. Remove the stop ring and pulley from Pulley the DP original feed unit. Stop ring 9. Slide the DP feed holder and then remove the DP original feed belt unit from the DP original feed unit.
Page 769 2LB/2K9 DP original feed 12. Remove the stop ring from the DP origi- belt shaft B nal feed belt shaft B. 13. Pull out the DP original feed belt shaft B from the DP original feed belt unit. 14. Remove the DP feed collar B and DP original feed belt from the DP original feed belt shaft B.
Page 770: Detaching And Refitting The Dp Separation Pulley
2LB/2K9 (2) Detaching and refitting the DP separation pulley Procedure DP top cover 1. Open the DP top cover. 2. Remove the DP original feed guide and DP original feed unit. (See page 1-5-98) 3. Unhook the hook and then remove the DP separation pulley cover.
Page 771 2LB/2K9-2 (3) Detaching and refitting the CIS Procedure DP top cover 1. Open the DP top cover. Screw 2. Remove four screws from the upper side and reverse side of DP. Screw DP front 3. Pull forwards and then remove the DP left cover front left cover and DP front cover.
Page 772 2LB/2K9-2 6. Remove two screws from the rear side of machine and then remove the CIS unit upwards. CIS unit Screws Figure 1-5-179 7. Remove three connectors from the DP Connector SHD PWB. DP SHD PWB Connector Connector DP SHD PWB Figure 1-5-180 1-5-104...
Page 773 2LB/2K9-2 8. Remove the screw and then remove the CIS lower guide CIS lower guide. CIS rear holder 9. Remove the screw and then remove the Screw CIS upper guide. Screw 10. Remove the screw and then remove the CIS rear holder. CIS unit Screw CIS upper guide...
Page 774: Adjusting The Angle Of Leading Edge
2LB/2K9 (4) Adjusting the angle of leading edge Perform the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is laterally skewed. Procedure 3mm/4mm 3mm/4mm 1. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. 2.
Page 775 2LB/2K9 4. Remove the right hinge cover. 5. Turn adjusting screw at the rear side of the right hinge to adjust the DP position. For copy example 1: Turn the adjusting screw counterclock- wise and move the DP to the inner side. For copy example 2: Turn the adjusting screw clockwise and move the DP to the front side.
Page 776: Adjusting The Angle Of Trailing Edge
2LB/2K9 (5) Adjusting the angle of trailing edge Perform the following adjustment if the trailing edge of the copy image is laterally skewed. Procedure 1. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. 2.
Page 777 2LB/2K9-2 6. Remove the strap from the DP top cover. 7. Remove four screws and then remove the DP rear cover. Strap Screw DP rear cover Screw Screws Figure 1-5-189 8. Adjust the height of DP. Loosen the nut. For copy example 1: Loosen the adjusting screw.
Page 778 2LB/2K9 11. Open the DP. 12. Remove the original mat. 13. Place original mat with its Velcro Original mat upward over the contact glass. Align original mat corner that has 90 degrees of angle with the inner left cor- ner of the original instruction panel. 14.
Page 779 2LB/2K9 (6) Adjusting the hinge Perform this adjustment when the DP trails down when it is open. Procedure 1. Open the DP. 2. Rotate the adjusting screws at the front of the left hinge using a flat screwdriver Adjusting screw so that the DP won’t trail down.
Page 780 2LB/2K9 1-5-10 Others (1) Detaching the eject filters Procedure 1. Unhook the hook each and remove three eject filter units. Eject filter Eject filter unit 2. Remove the eject filter from the eject cover. 3. Clean or replace the eject filter and refit the filter.
Page 781 2LB/2K9 (2) Detaching and refitting the left filter Procedure 1. Remove the left filter covers by releas- ing the lever. 2. Remove the left filter. 3. Clean or replace the left filter and refit the filter. Left filter Lever Left filter cover Figure 1-5-194 1-5-113...
Page 782 2LB/2K9 (3) Detaching and refitting the fan filter and PU dust filters Procedure 1. Open the front middle cover (see page 1-5-41). 2. Remove the fan filter by releasing the lever. 3. Clean the fan filter and refit the filter. 4.
Page 783 2LB/2K9 (4) Detaching and refitting the transfer belt filters Procedure 1. Remove two transfer belt filters by releasing the lever. 2. Clean transfer belt filters and refit filters. Lever Transfer Lever belt filter Transfer belt filter Figure 1-5-196 1-5-115...
Page 784 2LB/2K9-1 (5) Detaching and refitting the toner disposal filter Procedure 1. Remove the screw and then remove the toner disposal filter cover. 2. Remove the toner disposal filter. 3. Clean or replace the toner disposal filter and refit the filter. Toner disposal filter Toner disposal...
Page 785 2LB/2K9-2 (6) Detaching and refitting the developer filter Procedure 1. Remove the developer filter cover by releasing the lever. 2. Remove the developer filter. 3. Clean the developer filter and refit the filter. Lever Developer filter Developer filter cover Figure 1-5-198 1-5-117...
Page 786 2LB/2K9 (7) Detaching and refitting the toner disposal box Procedure 1. Cover the area under the toner disposal box to prevent contamination due to the scattered toner. 2. Remove the screw and then remove the cable cover. 3. Remove two connectors. Connectors Cable cover...
Page 787 2LB/2K9 5. To replace the toner disposal box, per- Toner cap sheet form the following procedure: 6. Insert the sponge at the toner cap sheet into the opening of the toner disposal box that was removed. Sponge Aperture Toner disposal box Figure 1-5-201 7.
Page 788: Detaching And Refitting The Hard Disk Unit
2LB/2K9 (8) Detaching and refitting the hard disk unit Procedure 1. Perform maintenance mode U917 (backup data reading) (see page 1-3- 208). 2. Remove the rear upper cover (see page 1-5-74). 3. Release the wire saddle. 4. Remove two screws. Screws Wire saddle Figure 1-5-203...
Page 789 2LB/2K9 6. Remove four connectors from the hard disk unit while pushing the lock lever. Hard disk unit Lever Lever Connector Connector Figure 1-5-205 7. Replace the hard disk unit and refit all the removed parts. 8. Perform maintenance mode U024 (HDD formatting) (see page 1-3-30).
Page 790: Direction Of Installing The Principal Fan Motors
2LB/2K9-2 (9) Direction of installing the principal fan motors When detaching or refitting the fan motors, be careful of the airflow direction (intake or exhaust). Fuser front fan motor (Rating label:outside) Eject front LSU fan motor Y fan motor (Rating label:outside) (Rating label:inside) LSU fan motor C Eject fan motor 2...
Page 791 2LB/2K9-2 DP fan motor (Rating label:inside) Bridge fan motor (Rating label:inside) Eject rear fan motor (Rating label:outside) Exhaust fan motor 1 (Rating label:inside) Controller fan motor (Rating label:inside) Belt fan motor 1 (Rating label:inside) Belt fan motor 2 (Rating label:inside) Exhaust fan motor 2 (Rating label:inside) Power source fan motor...
Page 792 2LB/2K9-5 (10) Skewed paper feeding check/adjustment At the paper feed source which a sheet of wrinkled paper has caused, check how the paper is fed askew. Run U051 to reduce the curvature of paper at the regist roller and measure how the paper is fed askew. 1.
Page 793 2LB/2K9-5 Screw Screw Paper width guide Cassette Paper width guide Screw Screw If the B-A is negative, If the B-A is positive, rotate clockwise rotate counter-clockwise. The skew feed Paper width guide adjustment screw Paper width guide Figure 1-5-210 1-5-125...
Page 794 2LB/2K9 This page is intentionally left blank. 1-5-126...
Page 795: Upgrading The Firmware
2LB/2K9-3 1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement 1-6-1 Upgrading the firmware Follow the procedure below to upgrade the firmware of main PWB, operation PWB, engine PWB, ISC PWB, optional language and optional devices. Preparation Extract the file that has the download firmware and put them in the USB flash device. Procedure 1.
Page 796 2LB/2K9-5 Procedure for recovery of version upgrade using operation PWB Perform the following if the panel will not be activated due to a power failure during upgrading the version: Procedure 1. Turn the power switch on the machine off and unplug the power cable. Remove the USB flash device. 2.
Page 797: Emergency-Update
2LB/2K9-3 Emergency-UPDATE If the device is accidentally switched off and upgrading was incomplete, upgrade becomes impossible from a USB flash device. In that case, retry upgrading after recovering the software by following the procedure below. Preparation The CF memory card must be formatted in FAT or FAT32 in advance. Extract the main firmware to download from the file.
Page 798: Remarks On Main Pwb Replacement
2LB/2K9-3 1-6-2 Remarks on main PWB replacement When replacing the main PWB, remove the EEPROM (YC14) and code DIMM (YS4) from the main PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new main PWB. Main PWB EEPROM YC14 Figure 1-6-4 When refitting DIMM, check "CODE"...
Page 799 2LB/2K9-3 [Edit Destination] - One-touch presetting [User/Job accounting] - Defaults for user authentication and job accounting only. Resettings are not required as the data are stored in harddisk. [FAX] - FAX transmittion settings (tel. no. of itself) [System] - Network settings (IP address) [Adjustment/Maintenance] - Silent Mode setting 4.
Page 800: Remarks On Engine Pwb Replacement
2LB/2K9 1-6-3 Remarks on engine PWB replacement When replacing the engine PWB, remove the EEPROM (U100) from the engine PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new engine PWB. Engine PWB EEPROM U100 Figure 1-6-8 1-6-6...
Page 801: Paper Feed/Conveying Section
2LB/2K9 2-1 Mechanical Construction 2-1-1 Paper feed/conveying section Paper feed/conveying section consists of the paper feed unit that feeds paper from the cassette and the MP tray paper feed unit that feeds paper from the MP tray, and the paper conveying section that conveys the fed paper to the transfer/separation section.
Page 802 2LB/2K9 FEED_MOT_DIR YC2-2 FEED_MOT_RDY YC2-3 FEED_MOT_CLK YC2-4 FEED_MOT_REM YC2-5 ASIST_CL1 YC10-1 FEED_CL1_REM ASCL1 YC4-1 PFCL1 CAS1_P0_SENS YC8-11 PICK_SOL1_REM YC8-2 PUSOL1 PICK_SOL1_RET YC8-3 CAS1_EMPTY_SENS YC8-6 CAS1_LIFT_UP_SENS YC8-9 PCCL LIFT_MOT1_RET YC3-13 LIFT_MOT1_DR YC3-14 PGS1(U) CAS1_QUANT1 YC3-19 PGS1(L) CAS1_QUANT2 YC3-22 CAS1_WID PWSW1 YC3-5 CAS1_LNG1,2,3 ASCL2 PLSW1...
Page 803 2LB/2K9 (2) Large capacity feeder The paper feeder is comprised of the right- and left-hand cassettes and their feeding units, and the paper feeding section for the left-hand cassette. The paper loaded on the lifting plate in the right-hand cassette is picked up to the PF forwarding pulley, PF feeding pulley, and PF separator pulley, one by one;...
Page 804 2LB/2K9 Left cassette section Figure 2-1-4 Large capacity feeder (left cassette section) 1. PF forwarding pulley 2 7. PF cassette detection switch 2 (PFCDSW2) 2. PF paper feed pulley 2 8. PF paper gauge sensor 2 upper (PFPGS2(U)) 3. PF separation pulley 2 9.
Page 805 2LB/2K9 VFDSW PFPCS1 YC5-7 VFDCL PFPCCL1 YC5-3 PF_R_SOL _ACT,PF_R_SOL_KEP PFPUSOL1 YC5-9,10 PFPS1 PFLS1 PFPFCL1 SIZE_R_SW PFSDSW1 YC3-15 PFPCCL2 PFFS1 CW/CCW,CLK,REM PFPFM YC16-1,2,3,4 PFLM1 PAP_R_SW2 PFPGS1(U) YC3-6 PAP_R_SW1 PFPGS1(L) YC3-3 PFMPWB Figure 2-1-5 Large capacity feeder (right cassette section) block diagram 2-1-5...
Page 806 2LB/2K9 PFMPWB PFPS2 EMPTY_L_SW YC4-3 PFLS2 LIMIT_L_SW YC4-6 HFDCL2 PFPCCL3 YC15-5 PFPFCL2 FP_L_CL YC15-7 HFDSW PFPCS2 YC4-12 FD_L_SW PFFS2 YC4-8 PF_L_SOL_ACT,PF_L_SOL_KEP PFPUSOL2 YC14-7,8 SIZE_L_SW PFSDSW2 YC6-15 PFLM2 OUT2B, OUT2A YC7-1,2 PAP_L_SW2 PFPGS2(U) YC6-6 PAP_L_SW1 PFPGS2(L) YC6-3 Figure 2-1-6 Large capacity feeder (left cassette section) block diagram 2-1-6...
Page 807: Mp Tray Paper Feed Section
2LB/2K9 (3) MP tray paper feed section Paper is fed out of the MP tray by the rotation of the MP forwarding pulley, MP paper feed pulley and MP sep- aration pulley. The MP separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time by the torque lim- iter.
Page 808 2LB/2K9 RYPWB MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS MPLS1 YC3-5 MPF_PPR_SET MPPS YC3-3 MPF_CL_REM YC3-13 PFCL MPPLSW MPTSW MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS MPLS2 YC3-8 MPPWSW MPF_JAM_SENS MPFS YC3-11 MPF_LIFT_DR_B YC3-16 MPLM MPF_LIFT_DR_A YC3-15 MPF_WID1 YC2-7 MPF_WID2 YC2-5 MPF_WID3 YC2-4 MPF_LNG YC2-2 MPF_TABLE YC2-9 YC12 YC17 FPWB1 EPWB Figure 2-1-8 MP tray paper feed section block diagram 2-1-8...
Page 809: Paper Conveying Section
2LB/2K9-5 (4) Paper conveying section The paper conveying section conveys paper to the transfer/separation section as paper feeding from the cas- sette or MP tray, or as paper refeeding for duplex printing. Paper by feeding is conveyed by the middle roller to the position where the registration sensor (RS) is turned on, and then sent to the transfer/separation section by the right registration roller and left registration roller.
Page 810 2LB/2K9-5 REG_MOT_B/ YC25-1 FPWB2 REG_MOT_A/ YC25-2 REG_MOT_B YC25-3 REG_MOT_A YC25-4 REG_SENS YC7-12 FFED1_SENS YC7-9 FPWB1 MID_B/ YC7-1 MID_A/ YC7-2 MID_B YC7-3 MID_A YC7-4 FEED_MOT_DIR YC2-2 FEED_MOT_RDY YC2-3 FEED_MOT_CLK YC2-4 FEED_MOT_REM YC2-5 YC5-42 YC2-9 EPWB Figure 2-1-10 Paper conveying section block diagram 2-1-10...
Page 811: Drum Section
2LB/2K9-2 2-1-2 Drum section The drum section consists of the charger roller unit, drum and cleaning section. The drum is electrically charged uniformly by means of a charger roller to form a latent image on the surface. The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade and the cleaning roller which remove residual toner from the drum surface after transfer.
Page 812 2LB/2K9-2 HVPWB1 Drum Drum Drum Drum unit Y unit C unit M unit K CL-Y CL-C CL-M CL-K DRPWB-Y DRPWB-C DRPWB-M DRPWB-K EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM FRPWB EPWB MCPWB DRM-Y DRM-C DRM-K DRM-M Figure 2-1-12 Drum section block diagram 2-1-12...
Page 813: Developer Section
2LB/2K9 2-1-3 Developer section The developer unit consists of the sleeve roller that forms the magnetic brush, the magnet roller, the devel- oper blade and the developer screws that agitate the toner. Also, the toner sensor (TS) checks whether or not toner remains in the developer unit.
Page 814 2LB/2K9 HVPWB VM-Y VM-C VM-M VM-K Developer Developer Developer Developer unit Y unit C unit M unit K TS-Y TS-C TS-M TS-K FRPWB EPWB MCPWB DEVM-Y DEVM-C DEVM-K DEVM-M Figure 2-1-14 Developer section block diagram 2-1-14...
Page 815: Image Scanner Section
2LB/2K9 2-1-4 Optical section The optical section consists of the image scanner section for scanning and the laser scanner section for print- ing. (1) Image scanner section The original image is illuminated by the LED lamp and scanned by the CCD image sensor in the CCD PWB (CCDPWB) via the three mirrors and ISU lens, the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal.
Page 816 2LB/2K9 Original ODSW LLPWB CCDPWB Lens image sensor Image scanner unit ISCPWB MPWB Figure 2-1-16 Image scanner section block diagram 2-1-16...
Page 817: Laser Scanner Section
2LB/2K9 (2) Laser scanner section The charged surface of the drum is then scanned by the laser beam from the laser scanner unit. The laser beam is dispersed as the polygon motor (PM) revolves to reflect the laser beam over the drum. Various lenses and mirror are housed in the laser scanner unit, adjust the diameter of the laser beam, and focalize it at the drum surface.
Page 818 2LB/2K9 BD_Bk YC5-2 YC1-29 LSU_TH_Bk PDPWB-K YC5-3 YC1-28 LDD_CS_Bk YC5-9 YC1-22 DATA_1N_Bk YC5-25 YC1-6 Laser PWB-K DATA_1P_Bk YC5-26 YC1-5 scanner DATA_2N_Bk unit K YC5-28 YC1-3 DATA_2P_Bk YC1-2 YC5-29 REM_Bk YC4-3 LOCK_Bk PM-K YC4-4 CLK_Bk YC4-5 BD_M YC8-2 YC1-29 LSU_TH_M PDPWB-M YC8-3 YC1-28 LDD_CS_M...
Page 819: Transfer/Separation Section
2LB/2K9-2 2-1-5 Transfer/Separation section The transfer/separation section consists of the intermediate transfer unit section and the secondary transfer roller section. (1) Intermediate transfer unit section The intermediate transfer unit section consists of the transfer cleaning unit, the transfer belt, and the four pri- mary transfer rollers for respective color drums, and forms a full-color toner image by superimposing and transferring single-color toner images formed on each drum onto the transfer belt.
Page 820 2LB/2K9-2 HVPWB2 Transfer belt unit TRSS TRES TRBLS TRCM TRSM EPWB REG_SENS_F_P YC10-6 IDS1 REG_SENS_F_S YC10-7 REG_SENS_R_P YC10-11 IDS2 REG_SENS_R_S YC10-12 CLN_SOL_REM YC10-14 CLSOL FPWB1 CLN_SOL_RET YC10-15 TR_BRK YC13-1 TR_DIR YC13-2 TR_RDY YC13-3 TR_CLK YC13-4 TR_REM YC13-5 Figure 2-1-20 Intermediate transfer unit section block diagram 2-1-20...
Page 821: Secondary Transfer Roller Section
2LB/2K9 (2) Secondary transfer roller section The secondary transfer roller section consists of the secondary transfer roller mounted to the paper conveying unit and the separation brush. To the secondary transfer roller, DC bias is applied from the high voltage PWB 2 (HVPWB2).
Page 822 2LB/2K9-2 EPWB HVPWB2 Separation brush SP_REM Separation bias YC1-8 YC8-5 T2_REM Secondary transfer bias YC1-7 YC8-6 TRRS Secondary transfer roller TRRM FPWB1 PRS_REM1 YC1-16 YC6-49 PRS_REM2 YC1-15 YC6-50 PRS_SENS YC1-14 YC6-51 RYPWB YC14 Figure 2-1-22 Secondary transfer roller section block diagram 2-1-22...
Page 823 2LB/2K9-2 2-1-6 Fuser section The paper sent from the transfer/separation section is interleaved between the fuser roller and the press roller. The fuser roller (fuser belt) is heated by the fuser IH (FIH), and the toner is fused by heat and pressure and fixed onto the paper because the press roller is pressed by the fuser press spring.
Page 824 2LB/2K9-2 CW/CCW YC18-2 YC18-3 CLOCK YC18-4 START/STOP Fuser unit YC18-5 FIHPWB FUES YC27 FTH5 LIVE_OUT FTS2 YC5-1 FUBLS NEUTRAL_OUT YC5-3 COIL_LIVE FPWB1 YC9-1 COIL_COM FURM FURS YC10-1 +15V1 YC6-1 +15V2 FTS1 YC6-2 FTH1 FTH3 FTH4 FTH2 FRPWB IH_CORE_B/,B,A,A/ IHCM YC17-4,5,6,7 IH_CORE_SENS IHCS YC17-2...
Page 825 2LB/2K9-3 2-1-7 Feedshift/switchback sections The paper feedshift/switchback sections consists of the conveying path which sends the paper that has passed the fuser section to the bridge section, duplex conveying section or job separator. Figure 2-1-25 Feed shift/switchback section 1. Middle pulley 8.
Page 826 2LB/2K9 JUNC_SOL_KYU YC5-19 FSSOL JUNC_SOL_FUK YC5-20 EXIT_FEED_SENS YC5-13 EXIT_PAP_SENS YC5-16 FRPWB SB_CORE_B/ YC5-8 SB_CORE_A/ YC5-9 SB_CORE_B YC5-10 SB_CORE_A YC5-11 EPWB Figure 2-1-26 Feed shift/switchback section block diagram 2-1-26...
Page 827: Bridge Section
2LB/2K9 2-1-8 Bridge section Bridge section activates the convey roller to deliver the paper, which was sent by the feedshift/switchback sec- tion, to the eject tray after de-curling the paper using the decurler. Figure 2-1-27 Bridge section 1. BR press roller 1 9.
Page 828 2LB/2K9 EPWB YC20 BRMPWB YC20 YC20 BRIDGE2_B/,A/,B,A YC7-5,6,7,8 BRIDGE_SENS2 YC4-2 BRIDGE1_B/,A/,B,A YC7-1,2,3,4 GUIDE_B/,A/,B,A YC5-5,6,7,8 YC5-1,2,3,4 BRFSSOL DECAL_B/,A/,B,A BRES BRCM2 BRCM1 BRDM BRGM BRCS1 BRCS2 BRDS Figure 2-1-28 Bridge section block diagram 2-1-28...
Page 829 2LB/2K9 2-1-9 Job separator section The job separator switches the paper path to eject printed paper to the right tray. Figure 2-1-29 Job separator section 1. JS eject roller 2. JS eject pulleys 3. JS eject sensor (JSES) 4. Actuator (JS eject sensor) 5.
Page 830 2LB/2K9 JSMPWB JOB_OPEN_SENS YC2-2 JSES JOB_B/,A/,B,A YC2-4,5,6,7 JSEM JOB_SOL_OUT JSFSSOL YC2-9 FPWB1 Figure 2-1-30 Job separator section block diagram 2-1-30...
Page 831: Duplex Conveying Section
2LB/2K9 2-1-10 Duplex conveying section The duplex conveying section consists of conveying path which sends the paper sent from the feedshift/ switchback section to the paper feed/conveying section when duplex printing Figure 2-1-31 Duplex conveying section 1. Upper duplex roller 6.
Page 832 2LB/2K9 DU_ENTER_SENS DUS1 YC23-1 YC13-12 YC11-2 DU1_B/ YC23-6 YC13-7 YC16-1 DU1_A/ YC23-7 YC13-6 YC16-2 DUM1 DU1_B YC23-8 YC13-5 YC16-3 DU1_A YC23-9 YC13-4 YC16-4 FPWB1 RYPWB DU_SENS DUS2 YC14-5 YC1-14 YC9-2 DU2_B/ YC14-14 YC1-5 YC7-5 DU2_A/ YC14-15 YC1-4 YC7-6 DUM2 DU2_B YC14-16 YC1-3 YC7-7...
Page 833: Original Feed Section
2LB/2K9 2-1-11 Document processor (1) Original feed section The original feed section consists of the parts shown in figure. An original placed on the original table is con- veyed to the original conveying section. Original is fed by the rotation of the DP forwarding pulley and DP orig- inal feed belt.
Page 834 2LB/2K9 DPLS1 DPMFS DPLS2 DPOS DPOFM DPFS DPOWSW DPLM DPMPWB Figure 2-1-34 Original feed section block diagram 2-1-34...
Page 835: Original Conveying Section
2LB/2K9 (2) Original conveying section The original conveying section consists of the parts shown in figure. A conveyed original is scanned by the optical section (CCD) of machine when it passes through the slit glass of machine. An original of which scanning is complete is ejected to the original eject table by the eject roller. Figure 2-1-35 Original conveying section 1.
Page 836 2LB/2K9 DPMPWB RGST_2B,2A,1A,1B DPRM YC5-5,6,7,8 DPCS CNVY_2B,2A,1B,1A DPOCM YC14-1,2,3,4 EXIT_SW DPES YC4-A12 CCD_TMG_SW DPTS YC4-B6 RVRS_1B,1A,2A,2B DPSBM YC14-5,6,7,8 Serial communication data signal YC10 DPSPWB DPRPWB Figure 2-1-36 Original conveying section block diagram 2-1-36...
Page 837: Electrical Parts Layout
2LB/2K9-2 2-2 Electrical Parts Layout 2-2-1 Electrical parts layout (1) PWBs Machine front Machine inside Machine rear Figure 2-2-1 PWBs 2-2-1...
Page 838 2LB/2K9-2 Machine front Machine inside Machine rear Figure 2-2-2 PWBs (operation section) 1. Main PWB (MPWB) ......Controls the software such as the print data processing and provides the interface with computers. 2. Engine PWB (EPWB)......Controls printer hardware such as high voltage/bias output con- trol, paper conveying system control, and fuser temperature con- trol, etc.
Page 839 2LB/2K9-4 19. PD PWB K (PDPWB-K) ......Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam (black). 20. PD PWB M (PDPWB-M) ....... Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam (magenta). 21. PD PWB C (PDPWB-C)......Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam (cyan). 22.
Page 840 2LB/2K9-2 List of correspondences of PWB names Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Main PWB (MPWB) PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP Engine PWB (EPWB) PARTS PWB ENGINE ASSY SP Power source PWB (PSPWB) PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE SP High voltage PWB 1 (HVPWB1) PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE MAIN SP High voltage PWB 2 (HVPWB2)
Page 841 2LB/2K9-2 Name used in service manual Name used in parts list PF power source PWB (PFPSPWB) PARTS LVU MAIN 100 SP PARTS LVU MAIN 200 SP BR main PWB (BRMPWB) PARTS PWB BRIDGE ASSY SP JS main PWB (JSMPWB) PARTS PWB JOB SEPA ASSY SP DP relay PWB (DPRPWB) PARTS PWB DPIF ASSY SP Current PWB (CRPWB)
Page 842: Switches And Sensors
2LB/2K9-5 (2) Switches and sensors 53,54, 55,56 43,44 21 23 Machine front Machine inside Machine rear Figure 2-2-3 Switches and sensors 1. Main power switch (MSW) ....Turns ON/OFF the AC power source. 2. Front cover switch (FRCSW) ....Detects the opening and closing of the front cover. 3.
Page 843 2LB/2K9-5 10. Paper gauge sensor 2 (L) (PGS2(L))..Detects the paper gauge (cassette 2). 11. Paper length switch 1 (PLSW1) .... Detects the length of paper (cassette 1). 12. Paper length switch 2 (PLSW2) .... Detects the length of paper (cassette 2). 13.
Page 844 2LB/2K9 63. Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) ....... Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex section. 64. Duplex cover switch (DUCSW) ..... Detects the opening and closing of the duplex cover. 65. Waste toner sensor 1 (WTS1)....Detects when the waste toner box is full. 66.
Page 845 2LB/2K9 (3) Motors 19 22 Machine front Machine inside Machine rear Figure 2-2-4 Motors 1. Paper feed motor (PFM) ....... Drives the paper feed section. 2. Lift motor 1 (LM1)........Operates the bottom plate (cassette 1). 3. Lift motor 2 (LM2)........Operates the bottom plate (cassette 2). 4.
Page 846 2LB/2K9-2 10. Registration motor (RM)......Drives the registration section. 11. Middle motor (MM)........ Drives the paper conveying section. 12. Toner motor K (TM-K) ......Drives the toner container K. 13. Toner motor M (TM-M) ......Drives the toner container M. 14.
Page 847: Fan Motors
2LB/2K9-2 (4) Fan motors 20,21 14,15 Machine front Machine inside Machine rear Figure 2-2-5 Motors 1. Toner fan motor 1 (TFM1) ..... Collecting scattered toner. 2. Toner fan motor 2 (TFM2) ..... Collecting scattered toner. 3. Developer fan motor K (DEVFM-K) ..Cools the developer unit K. 4.
Page 848 2LB/2K9 10. LSU fan motor K (LSUFM-K) ....Cools the laser scanner unit K. 11. LSU fan motor M (LSUFM-M) ....Cools the laser scanner unit M. 12. LSU fan motor C (LSUFM-C)....Cools the laser scanner unit C. 13. LSU fan motor Y (LSUFM-Y) ....Cools the laser scanner unit Y. 14.
Page 849 2LB/2K9 (5) Others Machine front Machine inside Machine rear Figure 2-2-6 Others 1. Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) ....Primary paper feed from cassette 1. 2. Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) ....Primary paper feed from cassette 2. 3. Assist clutch 1 (ASCL1) ......Controls the drive of the assist roller. 4.
Page 850 2LB/2K9 9. PF paper conveying clutch 1 (PFPCCL1)..........Controls the drive of the vertical conveying section. 10. PF paper conveying clutch 2 (PFPCCL2)..........Controls the drive of the vertical conveying section. 11. PF paper conveying clutch 3 (PFPCCL3)..........Controls the drive of the horizontal conveying section. 12.
Page 851 2LB/2K9 (6) PWBs (document processor) Machine front Machine inside Machine rear Figure 2-2-7 PWBs (document processor) 1. DP main PWB (DPMPWB) ....Controls electrical components of the document processor. 2. DP LED PWB (DPLPWB) ..... Indicates presence of originals or an original jam. 3.
Page 852 2LB/2K9 (7) Switches and sensors (document processor) Machine front Machine inside Machine rear Figure 2-2-8 Switches and sensors (document processor) 1. DP open/close switch (DPOCSW) ..Detects the opening/closing of the document processor. 2. DP interlock switch (DPILSW) ....Breaks the safety circuit when the DP top cover is opened; resets original misfeed detection.
Page 853 2LB/2K9 (8) Motors (document processor) Machine front Machine inside Machine rear Figure 2-2-9 Motors (document processor) 1. DP original feed motor (DPOFM)..Drives the original feeding section. 2. DP ragistration motor (DPRM) ....Drives the DP registration roller. 3. DP conveying motor (DPOCM)..... Drives the original conveying section. 4.
Page 854 2LB/2K9 This page is intentionally left blank. 2-2-18...
Page 855 2LB/2K9 2-3 Operation of the PWBs 2-3-1 Main PWB YC12 YC13 YC17 YC21 YC25 YC16 YC11 U113 YC30 YC20 YC10 U112 YC33 YC23 YC27 YC32 YC24 YC18 BLACK BAT1 BLUE YC15 YC14 Figure 2-3-1 Main PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-1...
Page 856 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to HDD1 data signal hard disk 1 HDD1 data signal Ground HDD1 data signal HDD1 data signal Ground Ground Connected to HDD2 data signal hard disk 2 HDD2 data signal Ground HDD2 data signal HDD2 data signal Ground HSYNC_AN...
Page 857 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description SGND Ground Connected to 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal engine PWB 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal SGND Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal SGND Ground SLEEP...
Page 858 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description KMDET 0/3.3 V DC KMAS set signal Connected to Not used KMAS KMDREQ 0/3.3 V DC KMAS control signal KMACK 0/3.3 V DC KMAS control signal KMRXD 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KMAS received data signal SGND Ground KMTXD...
Page 859 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC10 Ground Connected to Ground DP relay 3.3V 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB 3.3V 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB 3.3V 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB 3.3V 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB...
Page 860 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC10 DBB7 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal Connected to HHALF 0/3.3 V DC DPRPWB Control signal DP relay SLEEP 0/3.3 V DC DPRPWB Control signal TWS_DET 0/3.3 V DC DPRPWB Control signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal...
Page 861 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC10 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB Control signal Connected to SCLKIN 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB clock signal DP relay 3.3V 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB 3.3V 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB 3.3V 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB...
Page 862 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC16 Ground Connected to 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal CF card 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal /CE1 0/3.3 V DC Control signal...
Page 863 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC16 RDY/BSY 0/3.3 V DC Control signal Connected to 0/3.3 V DC Control signal CF card CSEL 0/3.3 V DC Control signal 0/3.3 V DC Control signal RESET 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal /WAIT 0/3.3 V DC Control signal INPACK 0/3.3 V DC...
Page 864 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC24 +12V 12 V DC 12 V DC power from PSPWB Connected to +12V 12 V DC 12 V DC power from PSPWB power source +12V 12 V DC 12 V DC power from PSPWB +12V 12 V DC 12 V DC power from PSPWB...
Page 865: Engine Pwb
2LB/2K9 2-3-2 Engine PWB 12 6 1 B19 YC23 YC22 YC25 YC26 YC20 YC19 YC21 YC24 YC49 YC13 U100 YC10 YC50 YC46 YC47 Figure 2-3-2 Engine PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-11...
Page 866 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected 5 V DC 5 V DC power from FPWB1 to feed Ground PWB 1 +12V 12 V DC 12 V DC power from FPWB1 Ground Ground +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1 +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1...
Page 867 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description ZIG_SENS 0/3.3 V DC TRSS: On/Off Connected 5 V DC 5 V DC power to TRSS to transfer Ground belt unit Ground BLT_SPEED 0/3.3 V DC TRBLS: On/Off 5 V DC 5 V DC power to TRBLS TEMP Analog TEMP signal...
Page 868 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description CAS2_QUANT2 0/3.3 V DC PGS2(L): On/Off Connected CAS2_QUANT1 0/3.3 V DC PGS2(U): On/Off to feed CAS1_QUANT2 0/3.3 V DC PGS1(L): On/Off PWB 2 CAS1_QUANT1 0/3.3 V DC PGS1(U): On/Off LIFT_MOT1_LOCK 0/3.3 V DC LM1 lock signal LIFT_MOT2_LOCK 0/3.3 V DC LM2 lock signal...
Page 869 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected M_TEMP Not used to feed LOOP_SENS 0/3.3 V DC LPS: On/Off PWB 1 Ground EDGE_FAN_H 0/24 V DC FUFM: On/Off DU1_MOT_PD 0/3.3 V DC DUM1 control signal DU1_MOT_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DUM1 clock signal DU1_MOT_REM(C 0/3.3 V DC DUM1: On/Off...
Page 870 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description DRM_MOT_CLR_ Not used Connected DRM_MOT_BK_CL Not used to feed R_CLK PWB 1 DRM_MOT_CLR_ Not used DRM_MOT_CLR_ Not used Ground DLP_MOT_CLR_R Not used DLP_MOT_CLR_C Not used DLP_MOT_CLR_R Not used DLP_MOT_CLR_DI Not used Ground REG_MOT_PD 0/3.3 V DC RM control signal REG_MOT_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) RM clock signal...
Page 871 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected JOB_SET 0/3.3 V DC Job separator set signal to feed JOB_MOT_REM 0/3.3 V DC JSEM: On/Off PWB 1 JOB_MOT_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) JSEM clock signal JOB_MOT_DIR 0/3.3 V DC JSEM drive switch signal JOB_OPEN_SENS 0/3.3 V DC JSOCS: On/Off...
Page 872 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description MPF_LIF2 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off Connected MPF_LIFT1 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off to feed Ground PWB 1 TC_MOT_LOCK Not used TC_TONER_LED Not used TC_TONER_FULL Not used TC_TONER_VCON Not used INTER_LOCK Not used DU2_PD 0/3.3 V DC DUM2 control signal DU2_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DUM2 clock signal...
Page 873 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected WTNR_SET 0/3.3 V DC WTDSW: On/Off to front INTER_LOCK Not used IH_CORE_SENS 0/3.3 V DC IHCS: On/Off IH_CORE_MOT_R 0/24 V DC IHCM: On/Off IH_CORE_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) IHCM clock signal WTNR_LED 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) WTS1 LED emitter signal IH_COIL_FAN_AL 0/3.3 V DC FUFFM alarm signal...
Page 874 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description ROT_MOT_DIR Not used Connected ROT_HP_SENS 0/3.3 V DC DEVSS: On/Off to front THOP_MOT_Bk_R 0/24 V DC THM-K: On/Off THOP_MOT_M_R 0/24 V DC THM-M: On/Off THOP_MOT_C_RE 0/24 V DC THM-C: On/Off THOP_MOT_Y_RE 0/24 V DC THM-Y: On/Off Ground ENCODE_ Bk 0/3.3 V DC...
Page 875 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description MOT_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB clock signal Connected MOT_SDO 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB serial communication data to motor signal control MOT_SEL 0/3.3 V DC MCPWB select signal MOT_SDI 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB serial communication data signal MOT_RDY 0/3.3 V DC...
Page 876 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC10 Ground Connected DRM_INDEX_C 0/3.3 V DC DRM-C control signal to front ERS_C 0/24 V DC CL-C: On/Off TPD_C_1 Analog TS-C detection signal DLP_VCONT_C_1 0/3.3 V DC TS-C control signal TPD_TEMP_C Analog Developer thermistor C detection sig- Ground TN_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal...
Page 877 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC11 SGND Ground Connected DATA_2PBK(LVDS) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P) to LSU DATA_2NBK(LVDS 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N) relay PWB SGND Ground GAIN_FIX_BK 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal PARA_SIG_P2_BK 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal...
Page 878 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC11 PALA_STG_P2_C 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal Connected PALA_STG_P1_C 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal to LSU PALA_STG_P0_C 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal relay PWB INT_ST_C 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal SGND Ground DATA_2P_Y(LVDS) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P)
Page 879 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC12 CLK_BK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-K clock signal Connected LOCK_BK 0/3.3 V DC PM-K lock signal to LSU REM_BK 0/24 V DC PM-K: On/Off relay PWB SGND Ground DATA_1PBK(LVDS) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P) DATA_1NBK(LVDS 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N) SGND...
Page 880 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC12 SGND Ground Connected DATA_1P_C(LVDS) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P) to LSU DATA_1N_C(LVDS) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N) relay PWB SGND Ground SDCLK_C 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C clock signal SGND Ground PARA_SIG_P4_C...
Page 881 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC15 Ground Connected 3.3V2 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to LSURPWB to LSU Ground relay PWB Ground 3.3V2 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LSURPWB +5V AN 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LSURPWB YC16 SGND Ground...
Page 882 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC17 SGND Ground Connected DC_MAIN_CNT_M DC charger roller M control signal to high volt- MAIN_IDC_M DC charger roller M control signal age PWB 1 AC_SLV_CLK_M 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC sleeve bias M clock signal DC_SLV_CNT_M DC sleeve bias M control voltage DC_MAG_CNT_M...
Page 883 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC19 PF_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB clock signal Connected PF_SDO 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data to large signal capacity PF_SEL 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB select signal feeder, PF_SDI 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data toner fan signal motor 1/2,...
Page 884 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC19 B13 BELT_FAN1 0/24 V DC BLFM1: On/Off Connected B14 +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power to BLFM2 to large B15 BELT_FAN2 0/24 V DC BLFM2: On/Off capacity B16 DLP_FAN1 0/24 V DC EXFM1: On/Off feeder, toner fan...
Page 885 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC20 BRIDGE1 CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) BRCM1 clock signal Connected BRIDGE1 PD 0/3.3 V DC BRCM1 control signal to bridge BRIDGE1 DIR 0/3.3 V DC BRCM1 drive switch signal unit BRIDGE_SENS 2 0/3.3 V DC BRCS2: On/Off BRIDGE_OPEN 0/3.3 V DC...
Page 886 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC24 Ground Connected DC1_SET 0/3.3 V DC Key counter set signal to key coun- DC1_COUNT 0/3.3 V DC Key counter count signal +24V 1 24 V DC 24 V DC power to key card YC25 5 V DC 5 V DC power to key card Connected...
Page 887 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC26 A12 GND Ground Connected A13 FSR_SIZE_SENS 0/3.3 V DC FUES: On/Off to fuser unit A14 +5V 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FUES and fuser IH A15 GND Ground A16 FSR_RLS_SENS 0/3.3 V DC FURS: On/Off A17 +5V 5 V DC...
Page 888 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC27 Ground Connected EEP_SDA2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal to RFID EEP_SCL2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal PWB, toner 3.3V2 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to RFPWB motor K/M/ C/Y and +24V1 24 V DC...
Page 889 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC46 VSYNC_CN 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal Connected VSYNC_CP 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal to main VSYNC_DN 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal VSYNC_DP 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal SGND Ground TCLKP...
Page 890: Power Source Pwb
2LB/2K9 2-3-3 Power source PWB YC17 YC16 YC15 YC14 YC13 YC10 YC12 YC11 TB1 TB2 YC18 Figure 2-3-3 Power source PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-36...
Page 891 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description LIVE 120 V AC AC power input 220-240 V AC Connected to NEUTRAL 120 V AC AC power input AC inlet and 220-240 V AC main power LIVE 120 V AC AC power input switch 220-240 V AC NEUTRAL 120 V AC...
Page 892 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC10 +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power to LSURPWB Connected to +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power to LSURPWB LSU relay Ground Ground YC11 +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power to MCPWB Connected to +24V1 24 V DC...
Page 893 2LB/2K9 2-3-4 ISC PWB YC14 Figure 2-3-4 ISC PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-39...
Page 894 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description SC_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scanner clock signal Connected to SC_SO 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal main PWB SC_SI 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal SC_BSY 0/3.3 V DC Scanner busy signal SC_HLDN 0/3.3 V DC Scanner hold signal...
Page 895 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description +3.3V 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to HPS Connected to Ground home posi- HP_SW 0/3.3 V DC HPS: On/Off tion sensor Ground Connected to CCDCLK1 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal CCD PWB Ground CCDCLK2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal...
Page 896 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to CCDSEL 0/3.3 V DC Select signal CCD PWB Ground AFE_MCLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal GND(AFE_SHD) Ground CLPIN 0/3.3 V DC Clamp signal GND(AFE_SHP) Ground YC11 +5.1V 5 V DC 5 V DC power to CCDPWB Connected to Ground CCD PWB...
Page 897 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC14 +3.3V 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to ODSW Connected to Ground original CO_SW 0/3.3 V DC ODSW: On/Off detection switch 2-3-43...
Page 898: Operation Pwb
2LB/2K9 2-3-5 Operation PWB 1 YC15 Figure 2-3-5 Operation PWB 1 silk-screen diagram 2-3-44...
Page 899 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description 5 V DC 5 V DC power from MPWB Connected to 5 V DC 5 V DC power from MPWB main PWB 5 V DC 5 V DC power from MPWB Ground Ground Ground VBUS 5 V DC 5 V DC power input Connected to...
Page 900 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description SGND Ground Connected to SGND Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) LCD clock signal SGND Ground SGND Ground 0/3.3 V DC LCD Control signal R0(LSB) 0/3.3 V DC LCD Control signal 0/3.3 V DC LCD Control signal 0/3.3 V DC LCD Control signal SGND...
Page 901 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description 3.3V 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to LCD Connected to 3.3V 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to LCD 3.3V 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to LCD 3.3V 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to LCD BOT Y- Analog...
Page 902 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description SCAN4 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 4 Connected to KEY5 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return sig- operation nal 5 PWB 2 KEY6 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return sig- nal 6 KEY7 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return sig-...
Page 903: Front Pwb
2LB/2K9 2-3-6 Front PWB Figure 2-3-6 Front PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-49...
Page 904 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description +3.3V1 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from EPWB Connected to +3.3V2 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power from EPWB engine PWB 5 V DC 5 V DC power from EPWB +24V 24 V DC 24 V DC power from EPWB +24V 24 V DC...
Page 905 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to EEP_SDA1 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal engine PWB Ground TPD_Y_1 Analog TS-Y detection signal DLP_VCONT_Y_ 0/3.3 V DC TS-Y control signal TPD_TEMP_Y Analog Developer thermistor Y detection sig- ERS_Y_REM 0/24 V DC CL-Y: On/Off DRM_INDEX_ Y 0/3.3 V DC...
Page 906 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description EXIT_PAPER_SE 0/3.3 V DC ES: On/Off Connected to EXIT_FEED_SEN 0/3.3 V DC SBS: On/Off engine PWB SB_MOT_REM 0/3.3 V DC EM: On/Off SB_MOT_PH 0/3.3 V DC EM control signal SB_MOT_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EM clock signal SB_MOT_PD 0/3.3 V DC EM control signal...
Page 907 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description THOP_C 0/3.3 V DC THS-C: On/Off Connected to THOP_Y 0/3.3 V DC THS-Y: On/Off engine PWB Ground Not used Connected to LED1 Not used fuser front Not used fan motor LED2 Not used and eject front fan IH_COIL_FAN_AL 0/3.3 V DC...
Page 908 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DEVFM Connected to DLP_FAN_Bk 0/24 V DC DEVFM: On/Off inner unit 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DEVFM DLP_FAN_M 0/24 V DC DEVFM: On/Off Ground Ground Ground Ground...
Page 909 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description THOP_MOT_BK 0/24 V DC THM-K: On/Off Connected to THOP_MOT_DIR 0/3.3 V DC THM drive switch signal inner unit 24 V DC 24 V DC power to RTPWB 24 V DC 24 V DC power to RTPWB 3.3V2 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DRPWB-K...
Page 910 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC11 TPD_TEMP_M Analog Developer thermistor M detection sig- Connected to DLP_VCONT_M_ 0/3.3 V DC DEVPWB-M control signal developer unit M TPD_M_1 Analog DEVPWB-M detection signal TN_CLK_M 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal Ground DLP_ADR1_M Not used DLP_ADR0_M Not used EEP_SDA1...
Page 911 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC14 3.3V2 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DRPWB-Y Connected to EEP_SCL1 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal drum unit Y EEP_SDA1 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal Ground DRM_ADR0_ Y Not used DRM _ADR1_ Y Not used...
Page 912 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC16 Ground Connected to 5 V DC 5 V DC power to WTS2 front cover WTNR_NEAR Analog WTS2 detection signal switch, waste WTNR_LED 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) WTS2 LED emitter signal toner sensor 1/2 and 5V_LED 5 V DC 5 V DC power to WTS2...
Page 913 2LB/2K9 2-3-7 Feed PWB 1 YC20 YC27 YC26 YC23 YC22 YC25 YC11 YC15 Figure 2-3-7 Feed PWB 1 silk-screen diagram 2-3-59...
Page 914 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to REG_F_LED Analog IDS1 control signal engine PWB REG_SENS_F_P Analog IDS1 detection signal REG_SENS_F_S Analog IDS1 detection signal Ground REG_R_LED Analog IDS2 control signal REG_SENS_RP(B Analog IDS2 detection signal REG_SENS_RS(B Analog IDS2 detection signal CLN_SOL_REM 0/24 V DC CLSOL: On/Off (ACT)
Page 915 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description MPF_JAM 0/3.3 V DC MPFS: On/Off Connected to MPF_LIFT_DOWN 0/3.3 V DC MPLS2: On/Off engine PWB MPF_LIFT_UP 0/3.3 V DC MPLS1: On/Off MPF_PPR_SET 0/3.3 V DC MPPS: On/Off Ground MPF_LNG 0/3.3 V DC MPPLSW: On/Off MPF_WID3 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off...
Page 916 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to Ground engine PWB DRM_HEAT_REM Not used POWER_OFF 0/3.3 V DC Power off signal IH_PWB_FAN_AL 0/3.3 V DC IHFM alarm signal IH_PWB_FAN_H 0/24 V DC IHFM: On/Off IH_PWB_FAN_L Not used Ground REG_MOT_REM(C 0/3.3 V DC RM: On/Off REG_MOT_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) RM clock signal...
Page 917 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to DRM_MOT_BK_B Not used engine PWB DRM_MOT_BK_DI Not used DRM_MOT_BK_R Not used DRM_MOT_BK_R Not used Ground TRANS_MOT_BRK 0/3.3 V DC TRCM break signal TRANS_MOT_DIR 0/3.3 V DC TRCM drive switch signal TRANS_MOT_RDY 0/3.3 V DC TRCM ready signal TRANS_MOT_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TRCM clock signal...
Page 918 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB Connected to +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB power source +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB +12V 12 V DC 12 V DC power from PSPWB Ground...
Page 919 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC13 TRANS_MOT_BRK 0/3.3 V DC TRM break signal Connected to TRANS_MOT_DIR 0/3.3 V DC TRM drive switch signal transfer TRANS_MOT_RDY 0/3.3 V DC TRM ready signal motor TRANS_MOT_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TRM clock signal TRANS_MOT_RE 0/24 V DC TRM: On/Off...
Page 920 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC16 +24V2 24 V DC 24 V DC power to HVPWB2 Connected to Ground high voltage PWB 2 YC17 TC_TONER_LED Not used Connected to TC_TONER_FULL Not used relay PWB TC_TONER_MOT_ Not used TC_TONER_MOT_ Not used MPF_LIFT_MOT_B 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off...
Page 921 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC19 EXIT_REAR_FAN 0/24 V DC ERFM: On/Off Connected to +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power to ERFM eject rear fan motor YC20 JOB_SET 0/3.3 V DC Job separator set signal Connected to Ground job separator Ground JOB_MOT_REM...
Page 922 2LB/2K9-2 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC27 MAIN_HEAT_REM Not used Connected to SUB_HEAT_REM Not used fuser IH PWB +24V2 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FIHPWB ZEROC Not used Ground Ground FSR_RELAY 0/3.3 V DC Fuser relay signal +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FIHPWB PRESS_REM...
Page 923 2LB/2K9 2-3-8 Feed PWB 2 YC11 Figure 2-3-8 Feed PWB 2 silk-screen diagram 2-3-69...
Page 924 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to FEED_MOT_REM 0/3.3 V DC PFM: On/Off engine PWB FEED_MOT_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFM clock signal FEED_MOT_RDY 0/3.3 V DC PFM ready signal FEED_MOT_DIR 0/3.3 V DC PFM drive switch signal FEED_CL1_REM 0/24 V DC PFCL1: On/Off FEED_CL2_REM...
Page 925 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description PICK_SOL1_RET 0/24 V DC PUSOL1: On/Off (RET) Connected to PICK_SOL1_REM 0/24 V DC PUSOL1: On/Off (ACT) engine PWB CAS2_P0 0/3.3 V DC FS2: On/Off CAS2_LIFT_UP 0/3.3 V DC LS2: On/Off CAS2_EMPTY 0/3.3 V DC PS2: On/Off PICK_SOL2_RET 0/24 V DC PUSOL2: On/Off (RET)
Page 926 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description LIFT_MOT1_RET 0/24 V DC LM1: On/Off Connected to LIFT_MOT1_DR 0/24 V DC LM1: On/Off paper length LIFT_MOT2_RET 0/24 V DC LM2: On/Off switch 1/2, LIFT_MOT2_DR 0/24 V DC LM2: On/Off paper width switch 1/2, lift LED_5V 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PGS1(U)
Page 927 2LB/2K9-5 Connector Signal Voltage Description MID_B/ 0/24 V DC (pulse) MM drive control signal Connected to MID_A/ 0/24 V DC (pulse) MM drive control signal middle motor, MID_B 0/24 V DC (pulse) MM drive control signal middle sen- MID_A 0/24 V DC (pulse) MM drive control signal sor and reg- istration...
Page 928 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to CAS2_LIFT_UP_ 0/3.3 V DC LS2: On/Off primary SENS paper feed 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FS2 unit CAS2_P0_SENS 0/3.3 V DC FS2: On/Off Ground YC10 ASIST_CL1 0/24 V DC ASCL1: On/Off Connected to 24V2...
Page 929: Relay Pwb
2LB/2K9 2-3-9 Relay PWB YC16 YC11 Figure 2-3-9 Relay PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-75...
Page 930 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description 5V_LED Not used Connected to DU2_A 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal feed PWB 1 DU2_B 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal DU2_A/ 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal DU2_B/ 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM2 drive control signal...
Page 931 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description LED_3.3V3 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to MPPLSW Connected to Ground MP tray unit MPF_PPR_SET 0/3.3 V DC MPPS: On/Off Ground MPF_LIFT_UP_S 0/3.3 V DC MPLS1: On/Off 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MPLS1 Ground MPF_LIFT_DOW 0/3.3 V DC...
Page 932 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC10 LOOP_SENS 0/3.3 V DC LPS: On/Off Connected to Ground loop sensor 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LPS 3.3V Not used REG_BK_LED Not used Not used REG_BK_SENS1 Not used REG_BK_SENS1 Not used Not used BELT_JAM_SENS Not used...
Page 933 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC12 MPF_CL_REM 0/24 V DC MPPFCL: On/Off Connected to 24V2 24 V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1 feed PWB 1 MPF_LIFT_MOT_ 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off MPF_LIFT_MOT_ 0/24 V DC MPLM: On/Off TC_TONER_MOT Not used TC_TONER_MOT Not used...
Page 934 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC16 DU1_B/ 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal Connected to DU1_A/ 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal duplex motor DU1_B 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal DU1_A 0/24 V DC (pulse) DUM1 drive control signal EDGE_FAN_REM Not used...
Page 935: Motor Control Pwb
2LB/2K9 2-3-10 Motor control PWB Figure 2-3-10 Motor control PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-81...
Page 936 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to Ground power source Ground +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB DRM_INDEX_C 0/3.3 V DC DRM-C control signal...
Page 937 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description SIG2_C DC0V/3.3V DRM-C rotate position signal Connected to SIG2_Y DC0V/3.3V DRM-Y rotate position signal drum motor SIG1_C DC0V/3.3V DRM-C rotate position signal SIG1_Y DC0V/3.3V DRM-Y rotate position signal SGND Ground SGND Ground DC5V 5 V DC power to DRM-C DC5V 5 V DC power to DRM-Y DRM_C_BRAKE...
Page 938 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description Not used Connected to DRM_BK_CW/ 0/3.3 V DC DRM-BK control signal drum motor DRM_M_CW/ 0/3.3 V DC DRM-M control signal DRM_BK_FG 0/3.3 V DC DRM-BK control signal DRM_M_FG 0/3.3 V DC DRM-M control signal DRM_BK_VM 0/3.3 V DC DRM-BK control signal DRM_M_VM...
Page 939 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description DLP_M_GAIN Not used Connected to DLP_M_CW/CCW 0/24 V DC DEVM-M clock signal developer DLP_M_LD 0/3.3 V DC DEVM-M control signal motor K/M DLP_M_CLK 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DEVM-M clock signal DLP_M_S/S 0/3.3 V DC DEVM-M: On/Off PGND Ground +24V1...
Page 940: Lsu Relay Pwb
2LB/2K9 2-3-11 LSU relay PWB Figure 2-3-11 LSU relay PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-86...
Page 941 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB Connected +24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PSPWB to power Ground source Ground PWB and engine +5V1 5 V DC 5 V DC power from EPWB +5V1 5 V DC 5 V DC power from EPWB...
Page 942 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description DATA_2N_Y(LVDS) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N) Connected DATA_2P_Y(LVDS) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P) to engine SGND Ground INT_ST 1 C 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal PALA_SIG P0 C 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal PALA_SIG P1 C...
Page 943 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description SGND Ground Connected DATA_2NBk(LVDS) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N) to engine DATA_2PBk(LVDS) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P) SGND Ground SGND Ground Connected BD Y 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal Y to engine LSU_TH Y Analog...
Page 944 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description BD M 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal M Connected LSU_TH M Analog LSU thermistor M detection signal to engine CUALM M 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M alarm signal PALA_SIG P3 M 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal PALA_SIG P4 M 0/3.3 V DC...
Page 945 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description SGND Ground Connected BD Bk 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal K to APC LSU_TH Bk Analog LSU thermistor K detection signal PWB K PALA_SIG P3_2Bk Not used LDD_CS 2 Bk Not used 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB-K 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB-K...
Page 946 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description SDI2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal Connected SDO2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal to APC CLK2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K clock signal PWB M EEPROM CS 2 Bk 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K EEPROM data signal SGND Not used...
Page 947 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description PALA_SIG P3 M 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal Connected PALA_SIG P4 M 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal to APC SDCLK M 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M clock signal PWB M GAIN FIX M 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal DATA_1N_M(LVDS...
Page 948 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC10 PALA_SIG P1 C 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal Connected PALA_SIG P2 C 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal to APC PALA_SIG P3 C 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal PWB C PALA_SIG P4 C 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal SDCLK C...
Page 949 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC12 PALA_SIG P1 Y 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal Connected PALA_SIG P2 Y 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal to APC PALA_SIG P3 Y 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal PWB Y PALA_SIG P4 Y 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal SDCLK Y...
Page 950: Pf Main Pwb
2LB/2K9 2-3-12 PF main PWB YC12 YC11 Figure 2-3-12 PF main PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-96...
Page 951 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description PAP_R_SW1_PW 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFPGS1(L) Connected to Ground the PF paper PAP_R_SW1 0/3.3 V DC PFPGS1(L): On/Off gauge sen- PAP_R_SW2_PW 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to sor 1 lower, PFPGS1(U) PF paper...
Page 952 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to R_COVER_SW 0/3.3 V DC PFPCCSW: On/Off the PF paper VFDCL 0/24 V DC PFPCCL1: On/Off conveying 24V1 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PFPCCL1 cover switch, PF paper VFDSW_PW 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFPCS1 conveying...
Page 953 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description SIZE_L_SW 0/3.3 V DC PFSDSW1: On/Off Connected to DEK_L_SW_PW 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to the PF paper PFCDSW1 gauge sen- Ground sor 2 upper, DEK_L_SW 0/3.3 V DC PFCDSW1: On/Off PF paper gauge sen- Not used sor 2 lower,...
Page 954 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC14 HCUSW 0/3.3 V DC PFPCUSW: On/Off Connected to Ground the PF paper 24V3 Not used conveying RESOL_ACT Not used unit switch, PF pickup RESOL_KEP Not used solenoid 2 24V3 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PFPUSOL2 PF_L_SOL_ACT 0/24 V DC...
Page 955: Dp Main Pwb
2LB/2K9 2-3-13 DP main PWB YC10 YC11 YC14 Figure 2-3-13 DP main PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-101...
Page 956 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description Ground Connected to ENG_PAGEST 3.3 V DC Page set signal ISC PWB ENG_RDY 3.3 V DC Ready signal ENG_SEL 3.3 V DC Select signal ENG_CLK 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Clock signal ENG_SI 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal ENG_SO 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal...
Page 957 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC4_A ANODE 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPLS1 Connected to Ground DP lift sen- LF_UPSW 0/3.3 V DC DPLS1: On/Off sor 1, DP Ground feed sensor, DP eject FD_SW 0/3.3 V DC DPFS: On/Off sensor 3.3V...
Page 958 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description FEED3_OUT2B 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal Connected to FEED1_OUT2A 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal DP feed FEED2_OUT1A 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal motor, DP FEED4_OUT1B 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal registration motor, DP lift...
Page 959 2LB/2K9 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC11 SS_SCL 0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Clock signal Connected to SS_SDA 0/3.3 V DC Serial communication data signal the DP multi SS_1P 0/3.3 V DC DPMFS: On/Off feed sensor. SS_2P 0/3.3 V DC DPMFS: On/Off Ground 3.3V1 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPMFS...
Page 960 2LB/2K9 This page is intentionally left blank. 2-3-106...
Page 961 2LB/2K9-5 2-4 Appendixes 2-4-1 Appendixes (1) List of maintenance parts Maintenance part name Alternative Part No. part No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list PULLEY FEED 302K906350 2K906350 Paper feed pulley PULLEY RETARD 302K906360 2K906360 Separation pulley PULLEY PICKUP 302K906370 2K906370...
Page 962 2LB/2K9-5 Maintenance part name Alternative Part No. part No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list PARTS ROLLER DU LOW SP 302K994470 2K994470 Lower duplex roller PARTS ROLLER DU MID SP 302K994480 2K994480 Middle duplex roller PARTS ROLLER DU UP SP 302K994491 2K994491 Upper duplex roller...
Page 963: Maintenance Kits
2LB/2K9-2 (2) Maintenance kits Maintenance part name Alternative Parts No. part No. Name used in service Name used in parts list MK-8705A/Maintenance kit MK-8705A/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702K90UN0 072K90UN (600,000 pages) Drum unit K DK-8705(K) Developer unit K DV-8705K Transfer belt unit TR-8505 Transfer roller PARTS ROLLER SECONDLY...
Page 964 2LB/2K9-5 Maintenance part name Alternative Parts No. part No. Name used in service Name used in parts list MK-8705D/Maintenance kit MK-8705D/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702K90UN2 072K90U2 (300,000 pages) Charger roller unit MC-8705 Developer unit K DV-8705K Toner disposal box PARTS DISPOSAL UNIT(M2) SP MK-8705E/Maintenance kit MK-8705E/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702K90UN3...
Page 965: Periodic Maintenance Procedures
2LB/2K9-5 (3) Periodic maintenance procedures CH: Check, CL: Clean, AD: Adjust, LU: Lubrication, RE: Replace Periodic maintenance Maintenance User (x1000 counts) Section Points and cautions Page part/location call 1200 Test copy Perform at the Test copy and test maximum copy print size Periodic maintenance...
Page 966 2LB/2K9-5 Periodic maintenance Maintenance User (x1000 counts) Section Points and cautions Page part/location call 1200 Devel- Cleaning the inner Vacuum. P.2-4-12 oper sec- air duc * : If toner is observed at tion the duct. Replace: MK-8705A Developer unit K P.1-5-44 Replace: MK-8705D Replace: MK-8705B...
Page 967 2LB/2K9-5 Periodic maintenance Maintenance User (x1000 counts) Section Points and cautions Page part/location call 150/ 450/ 750/ 1050/ 1200 Paper Paper feed pulley Clean with alcohol or a dry P.1-5-9 feed , cloth. P.1-5-10 convey- CH: performing U901 and ing sec- check feeding count: Tar- tion get to replace at 150K.
Page 968 2LB/2K9-5 Periodic maintenance Maintenance User (x1000 counts) Section Points and cautions Page part/location call 1200 Eject, Lower duplex Clean with alcohol or a dry Duplex roller cloth. section Middle duplex Clean with alcohol or a dry roller cloth. Upper duplex Clean with alcohol or a dry roller cloth.
Page 969 2LB/2K9-5 Periodic maintenance Maintenance User (x1000 counts) Section Points and cautions Page part/location call 1200 Scanner Contact glass DP slit glass: CL dry cloth Optical or alcohol wet cloth is section strictly prohibited. When installing DP, CL with dry cloth.Contact glass for original: CL alco- hol or dry cloth.(Face Side)
Page 970 2LB/2K9-5 Periodic maintenance Maintenance User (x1000 counts) Section Points and cautions Page part/location call 1200 Driving, Fan filter Vacuum. P.1-5-114 Other PU dust filter Vacuum. 4pcs P.1-5-114 Developer filter Vacuum. P.1-5-117 Transfer belt filter Vacuum. 2pcs P.1-5-115 Left filter Replace: MK-8705C P.1-5-113 Eject filter Replace: MK-8705C...
Page 971 2LB/2K9-4 (4) Inner Cleaning To avoid contamination due to the toner that scatters from the unit, perform checking toner clogging and vac- uuming the toner in the duct of the toner collection unit. (To be performed at 300kpm maintenance.) Toner duct Toner Collection Inlet Duct at the back of the developer unit...
Page 972 2LB/2K9-4 2. Cleaning the inner air duct Procedure 1. Remove the transfer belt unit (see page P.1-5-49). 2. Remove the inner unit (see page P.1-5-41). 3. Remove the developer unit and drum unit (see page P.1-5-44). 4. Using a vacuum cleaner inserted at the Toner Collection Inlet opening at the right side of the convey- ing unit, vacuum the toner from the...
Page 973 2LB/2K9-4 3. Cleaning the duct at the back of the developer unit Procedure 1. Remove the developer unit and drum unit (see page P.1-5-44). 2. Using a vacuum cleaner, vacuum the Toner Collection Inlet toner in the toner collection duct at the back side of the developer unit for 30 seconds.
Page 974 2LB/2K9-5 4. Cleaning the paper conveying plate Procedure 1. Pull out the paper conveying unit. Paper conveying unit 2. Clean the side of the paper conveying Paper conveying plate plate, which paper runs through. * : Use a dry, soft cloth for cleaning. Figure 2-4-7 5.
Page 975: Repetitive Defects Gauge
2LB/2K9-2 (5) Repetitive defects gauge First occurrence of defect 37.5 mm/1 " Charger roller 39 mm/1 " Magnet roller 9/16 Sleeve roller 57 mm/2 " Right registration roller 63 mm/2 " Left registration roller 75 mm/2 " Transfer roller 15/16 125 mm/4 "...
Page 976: Firmware Environment Commands
2LB/2K9-5 (6) Firmware environment commands The printer maintains a number of printing parameters in its memory. There parameters may be changed per- manently with the FRPO (Firmware RePrOgram) commands. This section provides information on how to use the FRPO command and its parameters using examples. Using FRPO commands for reprogramming firmware The current settings of the FRPO parameters are listed as optional values on the service status page.
Page 977 2LB/2K9 Factory Item FRPO Setting values setting Ecoprint level 0: Off 2: On Default emulation mode 6: PCL 6 120V: 9 9: KPDL 220-240V: 6 Carriage-return action 0: Ignores 1: Carriage-return 2: Carriage-return + linefeed Linefeed action 0: Ignores 1: Linefeed 2: Linefeed + carriage-return Automatic emulation switching 0: AES disabled...
Page 978 2LB/2K9-5 Factory Item FRPO Setting values setting Default paper size 0: Size of the default paper cassette (See R4.) 1: Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2 inches) 2: Business (4-1/8 × 9-1/2 inches) 3: International DL (11 × 22 cm) 4: International C5 (16.2 × 22.9 cm) 5: Executive (7-1/4 ×...
Page 979 2LB/2K9 Factory Item FRPO Setting values setting A4/letter equation 0: Off 1: On Host buffer size 0: 10 KB 1: 100 KB 2: 1024 KB Wide A4 0: Off 1: On Line spacing * Lines per inch (integer value) Lines per inch (decimal value) Character spacing * Characters per inch (integer value) Characters per inch (decimal value)
Page 980 2LB/2K9 Factory Item FRPO Setting values setting Default weight 0: Courier = darkness (courier and letter Gothic) Letter Gothic = darkness 1: Courier = regular Letter Gothic = darkness 4: Courier = darkness Letter Gothic = regular 5: Courier = regular Letter Gothic = regular Color mode 0: Black &...
Page 981 2LB/2K9-5 Factory Item FRPO Setting values setting PCL paper source 0: Paper selection depending on an escape sequence compatible with HP-LJ5Si. 2: Paper selection depending on an escape sequence compatible with HP-LJ8000. Automatic continue for ‘Press 0: Off GO’ 1: On Automatic continue timer Value in units of 5 seconds (1 to 99) 6 (30 s)
Page 982 2LB/2K9-2 (7) Chart of image adjustment procedures Maintenance mode Adjusting Item Image Description Original Page Remarks order Item No. Mode Adjusting the magnification in the Data processing U039 Sub Scan U039 test pattern P.1-3-40 auxiliary scanning direction (printing adjustment) Adjusting the center line of the MP Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSU Out Left...
Page 983 2LB/2K9 Maintenance mode Adjusting Item Image Description Original Page Remarks order Item No. Mode Adjusting the center line Adjusting the original scan data U067 Front Test chart P.1-3-55 U067: For copying an original placed on (scanning adjustment) (image adjustment) Rotate the platen.
Page 984 2LB/2K9 (8) Wiring diagram No.1 YC18 BRIDGE UNIT DF _ CLK DF _ SDO DF _ SEL DF _ SDI DF _ RDY BRES DF _ DET Vout Relay YC20 BRECSW DFMPWB EXIT _ SENS EXIT _ COV _ OPEN EXIT _ SOL _ RET BRFSSOL Relay...
Page 985 2LB/2K9 No.2 YC11 SGND SGND SGND SGND BD Bk BD Bk LSU _ TH Bk LSU _ TH Bk SGND SGND PDPWB-K YC10 PALA _ SIG P3 _ 2Bk PALA _ SIG P3 _ 2Bk SGND SGND LDD _ CS 2 Bk LDD _ CS 2 Bk SGND SGND...
Page 986 2LB/2K9 No.3 YC16 3.3V1 Developer unit K I2C _ SDA TPD _ TEMP _ BK TPD_TEMP I2C _ SCL DLP _ VCONT _ BK _ 1 DLP_VCONT TPD _ BK _ 1 TPD_1 FRONT _ OPEN TN _ CLK _ BK FRCSW TN_CLK TS-K...
Page 987 2LB/2K9 No.4 FRPWB RTPWB 5V _ LED WTNR _ LED DLP_FAN_Bk DLP_FAN_Bk WTNR _ FULL DLP _ FAN _ COLOR DLP _ FAN _ COLOR 5V _ LED WTNR _ LED WTNR _ NEAR WTNR _ SET DEVFM-K Relay DLP _ FAN _ Bk LED1 DEVFM-M Relay...
Page 988 2LB/2K9 No.5 YC26 Fuser unit FSR _ BLT _ PLS FUBLS Vout FSR _ RLS _ SENS FURS Vout FSR _ SIZE _ SENS FUES Vout FSR _ RLS _ DR _ CW FURM Relay FSR _ RLS _ DR _ CCW +24V1 FSR _ FAN FSR _ FAN _ ALM...
Page 989 2LB/2K9 No.6 JOB _ SET JOB _ SET Fuser drive unit YC10 JOB _ MOT _ REM JOB _ MOT _ REM JOB _ MOT _ CLK JOB _ MOT _ CLK M _ TEMP JOB _ MOT _ DIR JOB _ MOT _ DIR JOB _ OPEN _ SENS JOB _ OPEN _ SENS...
Page 990 2LB/2K9 No.7 YC16 DU1 _ B/ DU1 _ A/ DUM1 DU1 _ B FPWB1 DU1 _ A EDGE _ FAN _ REM 24V2 EDGE _ FAN _ REM 24V2 YC23 YC13 3.3V 3.3V 24V2 DUFM1 Relay LOOP _ SENS LOOP _ SENS DU _ FAN _ REM EDGE _ FAN _ REM EDGE _ FAN _ REM...
Page 991 2LB/2K9-5 No.8 Middle guide unit YC12 YC11 MID _ B/ MID _ A/ +24V2 +24V2 MID _ B +24V2 +24V2 MID _ A YC13 BEND _ SENS From CRPWB CURRENT _ SIG FEED1 _ SENS Vout REG _ SENS Paper feed drive unit Vout FPWB1 MID _ CL _ REM...
Page 992 2LB/2K9 No.9 DRM-C SIG2 _ C SIG2_C SIG1 _ C SIG1_C S.GND SGND SIG _ 1 SGND SGND OUT_A DRM _ C _ BRAKE DRM _ C _ BRAKE S.GND ECPWB-C SIG _ 2 +24V +24V1 DRM _ C _ CW/CCW DRM _ C _ CW/CCW ICL _ MOT _ REM DRM _ C _ FG...
Page 993 2LB/2K9-4 No.10 YC15 +24V1 PCUSW +24V2 #250 LIVE IN HVPWB2 From Inlet To FPWB2 #250 CURRENT _ MONI LIVE OUT YC16 +24V2 +24V2 CRPWB YC17 POWER _ OFF POWER _ OFF DRM _ HEAT _ REM DRM _ HEAT _ REM YC13 FSR _ RELAY _ REM +24V1...
Page 994 2LB/2K9 No.11 MPWB GND(AFE _ SHP) GND(AFE _ SHP) CLPIN CLPIN YC25 GND(AFE _ SHD) GND(AFE _ SHD) AFE _ MCLK MCLK HTPDN HTPDN CCDSEL CCDSEL LOCKN LOCKN DIS _ CISCKN TXCLK1P TX0N TX0N YC10 DIS _ CISCKP TXCLK1N TX0P TX0P TXOUTC1P DIS _ CIS _ 5N...
Page 995 2LB/2K9 No.12 SGND SGND SGND SGND KMDET KMDET PHS TXD SGND SGND KMDREQ KMDREQ SGND SGND SGND SGND KMACK KMACK PHS DTR KMRXD KMRXD 5V OUT SGND R0(LSB) R0(LSB) SGND PHS RTS KMTXD KMTXD N.C. SGND SGND PHS DCD SGND SGND SGND SGND...
Page 996 2LB/2K9 No.13 FCPWB VBUS1 VBUS USB _ DN1 USB _ DN USB _ DP1 USB _ DP VBUS1 VBUS1 USB _ DN1 USB _ DN1 USB _ DP1 USB _ DP1 AUDIO1 AUDIO1 WAKEUP1 WAKEUP1 RESET1 RESET1 VBUS0 VBUS0 USB _ DN0 USB _ DN0 USB _ DP0 USB _ DP0...
Page 997: System Error (Fxxxx) Outline
2LB/2K9-5 (9) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline The document is subscribed to describe the outline of the factors of the Fxxx errors that are not described in service manual. Please utilize it to refer to checking the factors. Please utilize it as the measures when the system is not recovered after power off/on or it frequently occurs.
Page 998 2LB/2K9-5 Content Check procedure & check point Remark 1 Remark 2 1) Check connection of the harness (Panel to Main board), (Main board to HDD) and connectors and check function. 2) Check contact of the DDR memory by detaching and reattaching. and check [Main - Panel Interface] function.
Page 999 2LB/2K9-5 Content Check procedure & check point Remark 1 Remark 2 1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) 2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory An error is detected at the *The F1C4 error appears and check function.
Page 1000 2LB/2K9-5 Content Check procedure & check point Remark 1 Remark 2 1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) 2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory An error is detected at the and check function. F38X Authentication/permit 3) Replace the main board and check function.

This manual is also suitable for:

Taskalfa 7550ci